diff options
270 files changed, 1670 insertions, 1670 deletions
diff --git a/lib/libpam/modules/pam_login_access/login.access.5 b/lib/libpam/modules/pam_login_access/login.access.5 index 18685e8..d5af0ee 100644 --- a/lib/libpam/modules/pam_login_access/login.access.5 +++ b/lib/libpam/modules/pam_login_access/login.access.5 @@ -11,15 +11,15 @@ .Sh DESCRIPTION The .Nm -file specifies (user, host) combinations and/or (user, tty) +file specifies (user, host) combinations and/or (user, tty) combinations for which a login will be either accepted or refused. .Pp -When someone logs in, the +When someone logs in, the .Nm is scanned for the first entry that matches the (user, host) combination, or, in case of non-networked logins, the first entry that matches the (user, tty) combination. The -permissions field of that table entry determines whether the login will +permissions field of that table entry determines whether the login will be accepted or refused. .Pp Each line of the login access control table has three fields separated by a diff --git a/sbin/setkey/setkey.8 b/sbin/setkey/setkey.8 index bc1201b..0fedfe7 100644 --- a/sbin/setkey/setkey.8 +++ b/sbin/setkey/setkey.8 @@ -411,7 +411,7 @@ You have to consider and be careful to use them. .Li icmp .Li tcp .Li udp -all protocols +all protocols .\" .Pp .It Ar policy diff --git a/usr.bin/apply/apply.1 b/usr.bin/apply/apply.1 index 1cbcea9..398b761 100644 --- a/usr.bin/apply/apply.1 +++ b/usr.bin/apply/apply.1 @@ -135,5 +135,5 @@ commands in single quotes .Sh HISTORY The .Nm -command appeared in +command appeared in .Bx 4.2 . diff --git a/usr.bin/ar/ar.1 b/usr.bin/ar/ar.1 index fd11644..2f5e0df 100644 --- a/usr.bin/ar/ar.1 +++ b/usr.bin/ar/ar.1 @@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ utility is expected to offer a superset of the .St -p1003.2 functionality. .Sh SEE ALSO -.Xr ld 1 , +.Xr ld 1 , .Xr ranlib 1 , .Xr strmode 3 , .Xr ar 5 diff --git a/usr.bin/banner/banner.6 b/usr.bin/banner/banner.6 index 7861de5..0c2f228 100644 --- a/usr.bin/banner/banner.6 +++ b/usr.bin/banner/banner.6 @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ .Dt BANNER 6 .Os .Sh NAME -.Nm banner +.Nm banner .Nd print large banner on printer .Sh SYNOPSIS .Nm diff --git a/usr.bin/basename/basename.1 b/usr.bin/basename/basename.1 index 23f3f7a..963c6bf 100644 --- a/usr.bin/basename/basename.1 +++ b/usr.bin/basename/basename.1 @@ -70,9 +70,9 @@ with the last slash .Ql \&/ character to the end of .Ar string -(after first stripping trailing slashes), +(after first stripping trailing slashes), and writes the result to the standard output. -.Sh EXAMPLES +.Sh EXAMPLES The following line sets the shell variable .Ev FOO to diff --git a/usr.bin/biff/biff.1 b/usr.bin/biff/biff.1 index cd7434f..decca64 100644 --- a/usr.bin/biff/biff.1 +++ b/usr.bin/biff/biff.1 @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ variable of .Sh HISTORY The .Nm -command appeared in +command appeared in .Bx 4.0 . It was named after the dog of Heidi Stettner. He died diff --git a/usr.bin/calendar/calendar.1 b/usr.bin/calendar/calendar.1 index b9a61f3..cadf383 100644 --- a/usr.bin/calendar/calendar.1 +++ b/usr.bin/calendar/calendar.1 @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Print lines from today and the previous .Ar num days (backward, past). .It Fl f Pa calendarfile -Use +Use .Pa calendarfile as the default calendar file. .It Xo Fl t @@ -109,11 +109,11 @@ multiple line specifications for a single date. ``Easter'', is Easter for this year, and may be followed by a positive or negative integer. .Pp -``Paskha'', is Orthodox Easter for this year, and may be followed by a +``Paskha'', is Orthodox Easter for this year, and may be followed by a positive or negative integer. .Pp Weekdays may be followed by ``-4'' ... ``+5'' (aliases for -last, first, second, third, fourth) for moving events like +last, first, second, third, fourth) for moving events like ``the last Monday in April'' .Pp By convention, dates followed by an asterisk are not fixed, i.e., change @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ Paskha\fB\et\fROrthodox Easter file in current directory .It Pa ~/.calendar .Pa calendar -HOME directory. +HOME directory. .Nm does a chdir into this directory if it exists. .It Pa ~/.calendar/calendar diff --git a/usr.bin/cap_mkdb/cap_mkdb.1 b/usr.bin/cap_mkdb/cap_mkdb.1 index ac00e89..5bee54f 100644 --- a/usr.bin/cap_mkdb/cap_mkdb.1 +++ b/usr.bin/cap_mkdb/cap_mkdb.1 @@ -45,15 +45,15 @@ .Ar file .Op Ar .Sh DESCRIPTION -.Nm Cap_mkdb +.Nm Cap_mkdb builds a hashed database out of the -.Xr getcap 3 +.Xr getcap 3 logical database constructed by the concatenation of the specified files. .Pp The database is named by the basename of the first file argument and the string -.Dq .db . +.Dq .db . The .Xr getcap 3 routines can access the database in this form much more quickly diff --git a/usr.bin/chat/chat.8 b/usr.bin/chat/chat.8 index 8bea555..306192c 100644 --- a/usr.bin/chat/chat.8 +++ b/usr.bin/chat/chat.8 @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ substituted for the \\T substitution metacharacter in a send string. .B -U \fI<phone number 2> Pass in a second string, usually a phone number, that will be substituted for the \\U substitution metacharacter in a send string. -This is useful when dialing an ISDN terminal adapter that requires two +This is useful when dialing an ISDN terminal adapter that requires two numbers. .TP .B script @@ -245,19 +245,19 @@ The SAY strings could be used to give progress messages in sections of the script where you want to have 'ECHO OFF' but still let the user know what is happening. An example is: .IP -ABORT BUSY +ABORT BUSY .br -ECHO OFF +ECHO OFF .br -SAY "Dialling your ISP...\\n" +SAY "Dialling your ISP...\\n" .br -\&'' ATDT5551212 +\&'' ATDT5551212 .br TIMEOUT 120 .br SAY "Waiting up to 2 minutes for connection ... " .br -CONNECT '' +CONNECT '' .br SAY "Connected, now logging in ...\\n" .br @@ -481,7 +481,7 @@ The delay is 1/10th of a second. .I (not valid in expect.) .TP .B \\\\q -Suppress writing the string to +Suppress writing the string to .IR syslogd (8). The string ?????? is written to the log in its place. diff --git a/usr.bin/checknr/checknr.1 b/usr.bin/checknr/checknr.1 index 831cba1..f10841e 100644 --- a/usr.bin/checknr/checknr.1 +++ b/usr.bin/checknr/checknr.1 @@ -156,5 +156,5 @@ such as conditionals. .Sh HISTORY The .Nm -command appeared in +command appeared in .Bx 4.0 . diff --git a/usr.bin/chpass/chpass.1 b/usr.bin/chpass/chpass.1 index 0a01472..cb1877b 100644 --- a/usr.bin/chpass/chpass.1 +++ b/usr.bin/chpass/chpass.1 @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ gcos fields (typically used for site specific user information). Note that .Xr finger 1 will display the office location and office phone together under the -heading +heading .Ar Office: . .Pp The user's @@ -410,7 +410,7 @@ slave, in a given NIS domain will do. .Pp When using the .Fl d -option, the hostname defaults to +option, the hostname defaults to .Dq localhost . The .Fl h @@ -477,5 +477,5 @@ User information should (and eventually will) be stored elsewhere. .Sh HISTORY The .Nm -command appeared in +command appeared in .Bx 4.3 Reno . diff --git a/usr.bin/cksum/cksum.1 b/usr.bin/cksum/cksum.1 index aea8d6d..465bd26 100644 --- a/usr.bin/cksum/cksum.1 +++ b/usr.bin/cksum/cksum.1 @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Use historic algorithms instead of the (superior) default one. .Pp Algorithm 1 is the algorithm used by historic .Bx -systems as the +systems as the .Xr sum 1 algorithm and by historic .At V diff --git a/usr.bin/cmp/cmp.1 b/usr.bin/cmp/cmp.1 index fe53d13..b8195fb 100644 --- a/usr.bin/cmp/cmp.1 +++ b/usr.bin/cmp/cmp.1 @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ byte values (octal) for each difference. Print nothing for differing files; return exit status only. .It Fl x -Like +Like .Fl l but prints in hexadecimal and using zero as index for the first byte in the files. @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ are not equal. .Pp The optional arguments .Ar skip1 -and +and .Ar skip2 are the byte offsets from the beginning of .Ar file1 diff --git a/usr.bin/col/col.1 b/usr.bin/col/col.1 index 72c76d9..e5b85fa 100644 --- a/usr.bin/col/col.1 +++ b/usr.bin/col/col.1 @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ and reads from the standard input and writes to the standard output. .Pp The options are as follows: -.Bl -tag -width indent +.Bl -tag -width indent .It Fl b Do not output any backspaces, printing only the last character written to each column position. diff --git a/usr.bin/colcrt/colcrt.1 b/usr.bin/colcrt/colcrt.1 index c2b8fa9..a1748c1 100644 --- a/usr.bin/colcrt/colcrt.1 +++ b/usr.bin/colcrt/colcrt.1 @@ -105,5 +105,5 @@ in documents which are already double-spaced. .Sh HISTORY The .Nm -command appeared in +command appeared in .Bx 3.0 . diff --git a/usr.bin/colrm/colrm.1 b/usr.bin/colrm/colrm.1 index 88e3483..edb4923 100644 --- a/usr.bin/colrm/colrm.1 +++ b/usr.bin/colrm/colrm.1 @@ -75,5 +75,5 @@ Backspace characters decrement the column count by one. .Sh HISTORY The .Nm -command appeared in +command appeared in .Bx 3.0 . diff --git a/usr.bin/column/column.1 b/usr.bin/column/column.1 index 6ed20ec..7663536 100644 --- a/usr.bin/column/column.1 +++ b/usr.bin/column/column.1 @@ -98,5 +98,5 @@ the screen if no other information is available. .Sh HISTORY The .Nm -command appeared in +command appeared in .Bx 4.3 Reno . diff --git a/usr.bin/compress/compress.1 b/usr.bin/compress/compress.1 index be679f5..4eb2288 100644 --- a/usr.bin/compress/compress.1 +++ b/usr.bin/compress/compress.1 @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ .Op Ar .Nm uncompress .Op Fl cfv -.Op Ar +.Op Ar .Nm zcat .Op Ar .Sh DESCRIPTION diff --git a/usr.bin/ctags/ctags.1 b/usr.bin/ctags/ctags.1 index 5ffc761..7082995 100644 --- a/usr.bin/ctags/ctags.1 +++ b/usr.bin/ctags/ctags.1 @@ -211,5 +211,5 @@ will similarly be noted. .Sh HISTORY The .Nm -command appeared in +command appeared in .Bx 3.0 . diff --git a/usr.bin/cut/cut.1 b/usr.bin/cut/cut.1 index 61efca3..65beeee 100644 --- a/usr.bin/cut/cut.1 +++ b/usr.bin/cut/cut.1 @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ input line. The options are as follows: .Bl -tag -width indent .It Fl b Ar list -The +The .Ar list specifies byte positions. .It Fl c Ar list diff --git a/usr.bin/doscmd/doscmd.1 b/usr.bin/doscmd/doscmd.1 index 8f730b6..e9253bd 100644 --- a/usr.bin/doscmd/doscmd.1 +++ b/usr.bin/doscmd/doscmd.1 @@ -41,10 +41,10 @@ .Fl 23AbDEfHIMOPRrtVvXxYz .Fl c Ar file .Fl d Ar file -.Fl i Ar port Ns Xo +.Fl i Ar port Ns Xo .Op : Ns Ar cnt .Xc -.Fl o Ar port Ns Xo +.Fl o Ar port Ns Xo .Op : Ns Ar cnt .Xc .Fl S Ar int @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ which allows it to run a larger variety of DOS applications. It should be noted that MS DOS 6.2 and higher appear to cause difficulties for .Nm . -To boot DOS, either provide the +To boot DOS, either provide the .Fl b flag or omit the .Ar cmd @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ and .Ar args are ignored. .Pp -Although +Although .Nm only provides a subset of DOS, it is sufficient to run a variety of programs, including, but not limited to, compilers, assemblers and @@ -417,7 +417,7 @@ the number of heads and .Ar sec the number of sectors per track, or it can be one of the standard types specified by -.Ar type +.Ar type (see below). The option .Ar fdisk_tab @@ -489,7 +489,7 @@ already defined: .Bd -literal .Cm "COMSPEC=C:\eCOMMAND.COM .Cm "PATH=C:\e -.Cm "PROMPT=DOS> +.Cm "PROMPT=DOS> .Ed .Pp The @@ -501,7 +501,7 @@ Like DOS, first will be looked for and then .Ar cmd.exe . .Sh "CONFIGURATION VARIABLES" -There are several variables in the +There are several variables in the .Cm .doscmdrc file which are internal to doscmd and do not actually get inserted into the DOS environment. These are: @@ -540,7 +540,7 @@ to let the X server find it. .Nm Doscmd translates .Tn BSD/OS -file names into +file names into .Tn DOS file names by converting to all upper case and eliminating any invalid character. It does not make any attempt to convert ASCII files into @@ -617,7 +617,7 @@ _ To install DOS on a pseudo hard disk under doscmd, do the following: .Bl -tag -width XXXX .It 1 -Create a +Create a .Pa .doscmdrc with at least the following: .Bd -literal -offset indent @@ -664,10 +664,10 @@ run doscmd. At the > prompt type .Li fdisk . .It 5 -Select +Select .Li Create DOS partition or Logical Drive . .It 6 -Select +Select .Li Create Primary DOS Partition . .It 7 Tell it how big to make it @@ -689,7 +689,7 @@ At the > prompt type Get out of doscmd. .It 13 Either remove the floppy from the drive or add the line -.Bd -literal -offset indent +.Bd -literal -offset indent boot C: .Ed to your @@ -711,7 +711,7 @@ redir.com Quit doscmd. .It 16 You know have a bootable pseudo disk which will automatically call -the magic +the magic .Li redir program, which installs .Fx @@ -736,7 +736,7 @@ and exit. .Pp If .Nm -emits the message +emits the message .Ic X11 support not compiled in when supplied the .Fl x @@ -744,10 +744,10 @@ switch, this support can be added by defining an environment variable .Ev X11BASE which points to the installed X Window System (normally .Pa /usr/X11R6 -) and then typing +) and then typing .Ic make install -in the source directory (normally -.Pa /usr/src/usr.bin/doscmd +in the source directory (normally +.Pa /usr/src/usr.bin/doscmd ). For this to work, the X programmer's kit must have been installed. .Sh AUTHORS .An Pace Willisson , diff --git a/usr.bin/du/du.1 b/usr.bin/du/du.1 index 9f69c5b..e9ebaae 100644 --- a/usr.bin/du/du.1 +++ b/usr.bin/du/du.1 @@ -107,8 +107,8 @@ Filesystem mount points are not traversed. counts the storage used by symbolic links and not the files they reference unless the .Fl H -or -.Fl L +or +.Fl L option is specified. If either the .Fl H diff --git a/usr.bin/ee/ee.1 b/usr.bin/ee/ee.1 index 708b7f5..4425992 100644 --- a/usr.bin/ee/ee.1 +++ b/usr.bin/ee/ee.1 @@ -17,27 +17,27 @@ .Op +# .Op Ar .Sh DESCRIPTION -The command -.Nm -is a simple screen oriented text editor. It is always in text insertion -mode unless there is a prompt at the bottom of the terminal, or a -menu present (in a box in the middle of the terminal). The command -.Nm ree -is the same as +The command +.Nm +is a simple screen oriented text editor. It is always in text insertion +mode unless there is a prompt at the bottom of the terminal, or a +menu present (in a box in the middle of the terminal). The command +.Nm ree +is the same as .Nm , -but restricted to editing the named +but restricted to editing the named file (no file operations, or shell escapes are allowed). .Pp -For +For .Nm -to work properly, the environment variable -.Ev TERM -must be set to indicate the type of terminal being used. For -example, for an -.Tn HP 700/92 -terminal, the -.Ev TERM -variable should be set to "70092". See your System Administrator if +to work properly, the environment variable +.Ev TERM +must be set to indicate the type of terminal being used. For +example, for an +.Tn HP 700/92 +terminal, the +.Ev TERM +variable should be set to "70092". See your System Administrator if you need more information. .Pp The following options are available: @@ -47,28 +47,28 @@ Turn off expansion of tab character to spaces. .It Fl i Turn off display of information window at top of terminal. .It Fl h -Turn off highlighting of borders of windows and menus (improves +Turn off highlighting of borders of windows and menus (improves performance on some terminals). .It Sy +# Move the cursor to line '#' at startup. .El .Ss "Control keys" -To do anything other than insert text, the user must use the control -keys (the -.Li Control -key, represented by a "^", pressed in conjunction with an -alphabetic key, e.g., ^a) and function keys available on the keyboard -(such as +To do anything other than insert text, the user must use the control +keys (the +.Li Control +key, represented by a "^", pressed in conjunction with an +alphabetic key, e.g., ^a) and function keys available on the keyboard +(such as .Em "Next Page" , .Em "Prev Page" , arrow keys, etc.). .Pp -Since not all terminals have function keys, +Since not all terminals have function keys, .Nm -has the basic cursor movement functions assigned to control keys as -well as more intuitive keys on the keyboard when available. For -instance, to move the cursor up, the user can use the up arrow key, -or +has the basic cursor movement functions assigned to control keys as +well as more intuitive keys on the keyboard when available. For +instance, to move the cursor up, the user can use the up arrow key, +or .Em ^u . .Bl -tag -width indent .It ^a @@ -123,10 +123,10 @@ Undelete the last deleted line. Pop up menu. .El .Ss "EMACS keys mode" -Since many shells provide an Emacs mode (for cursor movement and other editing -operations), some bindings that may be more useful for people familiar with -those bindings have been provided. These are accessible via the -.Em settings +Since many shells provide an Emacs mode (for cursor movement and other editing +operations), some bindings that may be more useful for people familiar with +those bindings have been provided. These are accessible via the +.Em settings menu, or via the initialization file (see below). The mappings are as follows: .Bl -tag -width indent .It ^a @@ -194,11 +194,11 @@ Insert a newline at the cursor position. Move the cursor in the direction indicated. .El .Ss Commands -Some operations require more information than a single keystroke can -provide. For the most basic operations, there is a menu that can be -obtained by pressing the +Some operations require more information than a single keystroke can +provide. For the most basic operations, there is a menu that can be +obtained by pressing the .Tn ESC -key. The same operations, and more can be performed by obtaining the +key. The same operations, and more can be performed by obtaining the command prompt (^c) and typing in one of the commands below. .Bl -tag -width indent .It ! Ns Ar cmd @@ -235,23 +235,23 @@ Write the text to the named .Ar file . .El .Ss "Menu Operations" -Pop-up menus can be obtained by pressing the -.Em escape -key (or -.Em ^[ -if no -.Em escape -key is present). When in the menu, the escape key can be -used to leave the menu without performing any operations. Use the up and -down arrow keys, or +Pop-up menus can be obtained by pressing the +.Em escape +key (or +.Em ^[ +if no +.Em escape +key is present). When in the menu, the escape key can be +used to leave the menu without performing any operations. Use the up and +down arrow keys, or .Em ^u -for moving up and -.Em ^d -for moving down to move to the desired items in the menu, then press -.Em return +for moving up and +.Em ^d +for moving down to move to the desired items in the menu, then press +.Em return to perform the indicated task. .Pp -To the left of each menu item is a letter, which if the corresponding +To the left of each menu item is a letter, which if the corresponding letter is pressed on the keyboard selects that menu entry. .Pp The main menu in @@ -259,30 +259,30 @@ The main menu in is as follows: .Bl -tag -width indent .It leave editor -If changes have been made, the user will get a menu prompting whether or +If changes have been made, the user will get a menu prompting whether or not the changes should be saved. .It help Display a help screen, with all of the keyboard operations and commands. .It file operations -Pop up a menu for selecting whether to read a file, write to a file, or -save the current contents of the editor, as well as send the contents of +Pop up a menu for selecting whether to read a file, write to a file, or +save the current contents of the editor, as well as send the contents of the editor to a print command (see the section .Sx "Initializing ee from a file" ) . .It redraw screen Provide a means to repaint the screen if the screen has been corrupted. .It settings -Show the current values of the operating modes, and right margin. By -pressing return when the cursor is on a particular item, the value can be +Show the current values of the operating modes, and right margin. By +pressing return when the cursor is on a particular item, the value can be changed. To leave this menu, press the .Em escape key. (See .Sx Modes below.) .It search -Pop up a menu in which the user may choose to enter a string to search +Pop up a menu in which the user may choose to enter a string to search for, or search for a string already entered. .It miscellaneous -Pop up a menu that allows the user to format the current paragraph, +Pop up a menu that allows the user to format the current paragraph, execute a shell command, or check the spelling of the text in the editor. .El .Ss "Paragraph Formatting" @@ -298,133 +298,133 @@ Line with no characters, or only spaces and/or tabs. Line starting with a period ('.') or right angle bracket ('>'). .El .Pp -A paragraph may be formatted two ways: explicitly by choosing the +A paragraph may be formatted two ways: explicitly by choosing the .Em format paragraph menu item, or by setting .Nm -to automatically -format paragraphs. The automatic mode may be set via a menu, or via the +to automatically +format paragraphs. The automatic mode may be set via a menu, or via the initialization file. .Pp There are three states for text operation in .Nm : -free-form, margins, +free-form, margins, and automatic formatting. .Pp -"Free-form" is best used for things like programming. There are no +"Free-form" is best used for things like programming. There are no restrictions on the length of lines, and no formatting takes place. .Pp -"Margins" allows the user to type in text without having to worry about going +"Margins" allows the user to type in text without having to worry about going beyond the right margin (the right margin may be set in the .Em settings -menu, the default is for the margin to be the right edge of the +menu, the default is for the margin to be the right edge of the terminal). This is the mode that allows the .Em format paragraph menu item to work. .Pp -"Automatic formatting" provides word-processor-like behavior. The user +"Automatic formatting" provides word-processor-like behavior. The user may type in text, while .Nm -will make sure the entire paragraph fits -within the width of the terminal every time the user inserts a space after -typing or deleting text. Margin observation must also be enabled in order for +will make sure the entire paragraph fits +within the width of the terminal every time the user inserts a space after +typing or deleting text. Margin observation must also be enabled in order for automatic formatting to occur. .Ss Modes Although .Nm -is a 'modeless' editor (it is in text insertion mode all the +is a 'modeless' editor (it is in text insertion mode all the time), there are modes in some of the things it does. These include: .Bl -tag -width indent .It tab expansion Tabs may be inserted as a single tab character, or replaced with spaces. .It case sensitivity -The search operation can be sensitive to whether characters are upper- or +The search operation can be sensitive to whether characters are upper- or lower-case, or ignore case completely. .It margins observed Lines can either be truncated at the right margin, or extend on forever. .It auto paragraph formatting -While typing in text, the editor can try to keep it looking reasonably well +While typing in text, the editor can try to keep it looking reasonably well within the width of the screen. .It eightbit characters -Toggle whether eight bit characters are displayed as their value in angle +Toggle whether eight bit characters are displayed as their value in angle brackets (e.g. "<220>") or as a character. .It info window -A window showing the keyboard operations that can be performed can be +A window showing the keyboard operations that can be performed can be displayed or not. .It emacs keys Control keys may be given bindings similar to emacs, or not. .It 16 bit characters -Toggles whether sixteen bit characters are handled as one 16-bit quantities or +Toggles whether sixteen bit characters are handled as one 16-bit quantities or two 8-bit quantities. This works primarily with the Chinese Big 5 code set. .El .Pp -You may set these modes via the initialization file (see below), or with a +You may set these modes via the initialization file (see below), or with a menu (see above). .Ss "Spell Checking" There are two ways to have the spelling in the text checked from .Nm . One is by the traditional .Xr spell 1 -command, the other is with the +command, the other is with the optional .Xr ispell 1 command. .Pp Using .Nm spell , -the words that are not recognized will be placed at the top +the words that are not recognized will be placed at the top of the file. For the .Nm ispell -option, the file is written to disk, +option, the file is written to disk, then .Nm ispell -run on the file, and the file read back in once +run on the file, and the file read back in once .Nm ispell has completed making changes to the file. .Ss "Printing the contents of the editor" -The user may select a menu item which prints the contents of the editor. +The user may select a menu item which prints the contents of the editor. .Nm -pipes the text in the editor to the command specified by the -initialization command +pipes the text in the editor to the command specified by the +initialization command .Em printcommand -(see the section +(see the section .Sx Initializing ee from a file below). The default is to send the contents to -.Xr lp 1 . +.Xr lp 1 . .Pp -Whatever the user assigns to -.Em printcommand -must take input from +Whatever the user assigns to +.Em printcommand +must take input from standard input. See your system administrator for more details. .Ss "Shell operations" -Shell commands can be executed from within -.Nm -by selecting the -.Em shell command -item in the -.Em miscellaneous -menu, or by placing an exclamation mark ("!") before the command to -execute at the -.Em command: -prompt. Additionally, the user may direct the contents of the edit buffer -out to a shell operation (via a pipe) by using the left angle bracket -(">"), followed by a "!" and the shell command to execute. The output of -a shell operation can also be directed into the edit buffer by using a -right angle bracket ("<") before the exclamation mark. These can even be -used together to send output to a shell operation and read back the -results into the editor. So, if the editor contained a list of words -to be sorted, they could be sorted by typing the following at the command +Shell commands can be executed from within +.Nm +by selecting the +.Em shell command +item in the +.Em miscellaneous +menu, or by placing an exclamation mark ("!") before the command to +execute at the +.Em command: +prompt. Additionally, the user may direct the contents of the edit buffer +out to a shell operation (via a pipe) by using the left angle bracket +(">"), followed by a "!" and the shell command to execute. The output of +a shell operation can also be directed into the edit buffer by using a +right angle bracket ("<") before the exclamation mark. These can even be +used together to send output to a shell operation and read back the +results into the editor. So, if the editor contained a list of words +to be sorted, they could be sorted by typing the following at the command prompt: -.Dl ><!sort -This would send the contents of the editor to be piped into the -.Xr sort 1 -utility and the result would be placed into the edit buffer at the current +.Dl ><!sort +This would send the contents of the editor to be piped into the +.Xr sort 1 +utility and the result would be placed into the edit buffer at the current cursor location. The old information would have to be deleted by the user. .Ss "Initializing ee from a file" Since different users have different preferences, .Nm -allows some -slight configurability. There are three possible locations for an +allows some +slight configurability. There are three possible locations for an initialization file for .Nm : the file @@ -433,21 +433,21 @@ the file .Pa .init.ee in the user's home directory, or the file .Pa .init.ee -in the current directory (if different from the home -directory). This allows system administrators to set some preferences for +in the current directory (if different from the home +directory). This allows system administrators to set some preferences for the users on a system-wide basis (for example, the .Em print -command), -and the user to customize settings for particular directories (like one +command), +and the user to customize settings for particular directories (like one for correspondence, and a different directory for programming). .Pp The file .Pa /usr/share/misc/init.ee -is read first, then +is read first, then .Pa $HOME/.init.ee , then .Pa .init.ee , -with the settings specified by the +with the settings specified by the most recent file read taking precedence. .Pp The following items may be entered in the initialization file: @@ -465,30 +465,30 @@ Cause .Nm to insert tabs as a single character. .It info -A small information window is displayed at the top of the terminal +A small information window is displayed at the top of the terminal (default). .It noinfo Turn off the display of the information window. .It margins Cause .Nm -to truncate lines at the right margin when the -cursor passes beyond the right margin as set by the user -while text is being inserted +to truncate lines at the right margin when the +cursor passes beyond the right margin as set by the user +while text is being inserted (default). .It nomargins Allow lines to extend beyond the right margin. .It autoformat Cause .Nm -to automatically try to format the current paragraph while +to automatically try to format the current paragraph while text insertion is occurring. .It noautoformat Turn off automatic paragraph formatting (default). .It printcommand Allow the setting of the print command (default: "lp"). .It rightmargin -The user can select a value for the right margin (the first column on the +The user can select a value for the right margin (the first column on the screen is zero). .It highlight Turn on highlighting of border of information window and menus (default). @@ -497,7 +497,7 @@ Turn off highlighting of border of information window and menus. .It eightbit Turn on display of eight bit characters. .It noeightbit -Turn off display of eight bit characters (they are displayed as their decimal +Turn off display of eight bit characters (they are displayed as their decimal value inside angle brackets, e.g., "<220>"). .It 16bit Turns on handling of 16-bit characters. @@ -509,48 +509,48 @@ Turns on emacs key bindings. Turns off emacs key bindings. .El .Ss "Save Editor Configuration" -When using this entry from the -.Em settings -menu, the user may choose to save the current configuration of +When using this entry from the +.Em settings +menu, the user may choose to save the current configuration of the editor (see .Sx Initializing ee from a file -above) to a file named -.Pa .init.ee -in the current directory or the user's home directory. If a file named -.Pa .init.ee -already exists, it will be renamed +above) to a file named +.Pa .init.ee +in the current directory or the user's home directory. If a file named +.Pa .init.ee +already exists, it will be renamed .Pa .init.ee.old . .Sh CAVEATS -THIS MATERIAL IS PROVIDED "AS IS". THERE ARE -NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS -MATERIAL, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE -IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND -FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Neither -Hewlett-Packard nor Hugh Mahon shall be liable -for errors contained herein, nor for -incidental or consequential damages in -connection with the furnishing, performance or -use of this material. Neither Hewlett-Packard -nor Hugh Mahon assumes any responsibility for -the use or reliability of this software or -documentation. This software and -documentation is totally UNSUPPORTED. There -is no support contract available. Hewlett-Packard -has done NO Quality Assurance on ANY -of the program or documentation. You may find -the quality of the materials inferior to -supported materials. +THIS MATERIAL IS PROVIDED "AS IS". THERE ARE +NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS +MATERIAL, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE +IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND +FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Neither +Hewlett-Packard nor Hugh Mahon shall be liable +for errors contained herein, nor for +incidental or consequential damages in +connection with the furnishing, performance or +use of this material. Neither Hewlett-Packard +nor Hugh Mahon assumes any responsibility for +the use or reliability of this software or +documentation. This software and +documentation is totally UNSUPPORTED. There +is no support contract available. Hewlett-Packard +has done NO Quality Assurance on ANY +of the program or documentation. You may find +the quality of the materials inferior to +supported materials. .Pp -Always make a copy of files that cannot be easily reproduced before +Always make a copy of files that cannot be easily reproduced before editing. Save files early, and save often. .Ss "International Code Set Support" .Nm Ee -supports single-byte character code sets (eight-bit clean), or the -Chinese Big-5 code set. (Other multi-byte code sets may function, but the -reason Big-5 works is that a two-byte character also takes up two columns on +supports single-byte character code sets (eight-bit clean), or the +Chinese Big-5 code set. (Other multi-byte code sets may function, but the +reason Big-5 works is that a two-byte character also takes up two columns on the screen.) .Sh WARNINGS -The automatic paragraph formatting operation +The automatic paragraph formatting operation may be too slow for slower systems. .Sh FILES .Bl -tag -width /usr/share/misc/init.ee -compact @@ -559,14 +559,14 @@ may be too slow for slower systems. .It Pa .init.ee .El .Sh AUTHORS -The software +The software .Nm was developed by .An Hugh Mahon . .Pp -This software and documentation contains -proprietary information which is protected by -copyright. All rights are reserved. +This software and documentation contains +proprietary information which is protected by +copyright. All rights are reserved. .Pp Copyright (c) 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1995, 1996 Hugh Mahon. .Sh "SEE ALSO" diff --git a/usr.bin/false/false.1 b/usr.bin/false/false.1 index c35b672..1e4a949 100644 --- a/usr.bin/false/false.1 +++ b/usr.bin/false/false.1 @@ -47,8 +47,8 @@ The .Nm command is usually used in a Bourne shell script. -It tests for the appropriate status "false" before running -(or failing to run) a list of commands. +It tests for the appropriate status "false" before running +(or failing to run) a list of commands. .Pp The .Nm diff --git a/usr.bin/fetch/fetch.1 b/usr.bin/fetch/fetch.1 index 8603b7f..c361115 100644 --- a/usr.bin/fetch/fetch.1 +++ b/usr.bin/fetch/fetch.1 @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ flags are mutually exclusive. .It Fl n Don't preserve the modification time of the transferred file. .It Fl o Ar file -Set the output file name to +Set the output file name to .Ar file . By default, a ``pathname'' is extracted from the specified URI, and its basename is used as the name of the output file. @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ Set timeout value to Overrides the environment variables .Ev FTP_TIMEOUT for FTP transfers or -.Ev HTTP_TIMEOUT +.Ev HTTP_TIMEOUT for HTTP transfers if set. .It Fl U When using passive FTP, allocate the port for the data connection from @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ only if they were all successfully retrieved. .Sh ENVIRONMENT .Bl -tag -width HTTP_TIMEOUT .It Ev FTP_TIMEOUT -maximum time, in seconds, to wait before aborting an +maximum time, in seconds, to wait before aborting an .Tn FTP connection. .It Ev HTTP_TIMEOUT @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ library are supported. .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr fetch 3 .Sh HISTORY -The +The .Nm command appeared in .Fx 2.1.5 . diff --git a/usr.bin/file/file.1 b/usr.bin/file/file.1 index 0bc0450..8f9451f 100644 --- a/usr.bin/file/file.1 +++ b/usr.bin/file/file.1 @@ -155,15 +155,15 @@ to be Do not prepend filenames to output lines (brief mode). .It Fl c Cause a checking printout of the parsed form of the magic file. -This is usually used in conjunction with +This is usually used in conjunction with .Fl m to debug a new magic file before installing it. .It Fl f Ar namefile -Read the names of the files to be examined from +Read the names of the files to be examined from .Ar namefile -(one per line) +(one per line) before the argument list. -Either +Either .Ar namefile or at least one filename argument must be present; to test the standard input, use @@ -243,12 +243,12 @@ can be used to set the default magic number files. .Sh STANDARDS CONFORMANCE This program is believed to exceed the System V Interface Definition of FILE(CMD), as near as one can determine from the vague language -contained therein. +contained therein. Its behaviour is mostly compatible with the System V program of the same name. This version knows more magic, however, so it will produce -different (albeit more accurate) output in many cases. +different (albeit more accurate) output in many cases. .Pp -The one significant difference +The one significant difference between this version and System V is that this version treats any white space as a delimiter, so that spaces in pattern strings must be escaped. @@ -286,7 +286,7 @@ mainly USENET, and contributed by various authors. .An Christos Zoulas (address below) will collect additional or corrected magic file entries. -A consolidation of magic file entries +A consolidation of magic file entries will be distributed periodically. .Pp The order of entries in the magic file is significant. @@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ If your old .Nm command uses a magic file, keep the old magic file around for comparison purposes -(rename it to +(rename it to .Pa /usr/share/misc/magic.orig ) . .Sh EXAMPLES .Bd -literal @@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ file: application/x-executable, dynamically linked (uses shared libs), no /dev/hda: application/x-not-regular-file .Ed .Sh HISTORY -There has been a +There has been a .Nm command in every .Ux diff --git a/usr.bin/file/magic.5 b/usr.bin/file/magic.5 index 9afcfab..445bdcb 100644 --- a/usr.bin/file/magic.5 +++ b/usr.bin/file/magic.5 @@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ .\" .Dd December 8, 2000 .Dt MAGIC 5 "Public Domain" -.Os +.Os .Sh NAME .Nm magic .Nd file command's magic number file @@ -110,10 +110,10 @@ value, to specify that the value from the file must be greater than the specified value, .Em & , -to specify that the value from the file must have set all of the bits +to specify that the value from the file must have set all of the bits that are set in the specified value, .Em ^ , -to specify that the value from the file must have clear any of the bits +to specify that the value from the file must have clear any of the bits that are set in the specified value, or .Em x , to specify that any value will match. @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ is octal, and is hexadecimal. .It "" For string values, the byte string from the -file must match the specified byte string. +file must match the specified byte string. The operators .Em = , .Em < @@ -184,11 +184,11 @@ The value at that offset is read, and is used again as an offset in the file. Indirect offsets are of the form: .Em (x[.[bslBSL]][+-][y]) . -The value of +The value of .Em x is used as an offset in the file. A byte, short or long is read at that offset -depending on the +depending on the .Em [bslBSL] type specifier. The capitalized types interpret the number as a big endian value, whereas @@ -203,13 +203,13 @@ Sometimes you do not know the exact offset as this depends on the length of preceding fields. You can specify an offset relative to the end of the last uplevel field (of course this may only be done for sublevel tests, i.e.\& -test beginning with +test beginning with .Em > Ns ) . Such a relative offset is specified using .Em & as a prefix to the offset. .Sh BUGS -The formats +The formats .Em long , .Em belong , .Em lelong , @@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ The formats and .Em ledate are system-dependent; perhaps they should be specified as a number -of bytes (2B, 4B, etc), +of bytes (2B, 4B, etc), since the files being recognized typically come from a system on which the lengths are invariant. .Pp @@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ indirect offsets. .\" Date: 3 Sep 85 08:19:07 GMT .\" Organization: Sun Microsystems, Inc. .\" Lines: 136 -.\" +.\" .\" Here's a manual page for the format accepted by the "file" made by adding .\" the changes I posted to the S5R2 version. .\" diff --git a/usr.bin/file2c/file2c.1 b/usr.bin/file2c/file2c.1 index dbcc4ea..c308aec 100644 --- a/usr.bin/file2c/file2c.1 +++ b/usr.bin/file2c/file2c.1 @@ -23,10 +23,10 @@ The utility reads a file from stdin and writes it to stdout, converting each byte to its decimal representation on the fly. .Pp -If the first +If the first +.Op string +is present, it is printed before the data; if the second .Op string -is present, it is printed before the data; if the second -.Op string is present, it is printed after the data. .Pp This program is used to embed binary or other files into C source files, diff --git a/usr.bin/from/from.1 b/usr.bin/from/from.1 index b889495..30d21cf 100644 --- a/usr.bin/from/from.1 +++ b/usr.bin/from/from.1 @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Options: .Bl -tag -width Fl .It Fl c Just print a count of messages and exit. -.It Fl f Ar file +.It Fl f Ar file The supplied file is examined instead of the invoker's mailbox. If the @@ -61,10 +61,10 @@ If the option is used, the .Ar user argument should not be used. -Read from standard input if file name -.Ar - +Read from standard input if file name +.Ar - is given. -.It Fl s Ar sender +.It Fl s Ar sender Only mail from addresses containing the supplied string are printed. diff --git a/usr.bin/fstat/fstat.1 b/usr.bin/fstat/fstat.1 index dfb4d07..578889b 100644 --- a/usr.bin/fstat/fstat.1 +++ b/usr.bin/fstat/fstat.1 @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ For tcp, it is the address of the tcpcb, and for udp, the inpcb (socket pcb). For unix domain sockets, its the address of the socket pcb and the address of the connected pcb (if connected). Otherwise the protocol number and address of the socket itself are printed. -The attempt is to make enough information available to +The attempt is to make enough information available to permit further analysis without duplicating .Xr netstat 1 . .Pp diff --git a/usr.bin/ftp/ftp.1 b/usr.bin/ftp/ftp.1 index eb7e420..8b2e45f 100644 --- a/usr.bin/ftp/ftp.1 +++ b/usr.bin/ftp/ftp.1 @@ -342,11 +342,11 @@ The current settings for and .Ic structure are used while transferring the file. -.It Ic gate Op Ar host Op Ar port +.It Ic gate Op Ar host Op Ar port Toggle gate-ftp mode. This will not be permitted if the gate-ftp server hasn't been set (either explicitly by the user, or from the -.Ev FTPSERVER +.Ev FTPSERVER environment variable). If .Ar host @@ -680,7 +680,7 @@ server (see below). Retrieve .Ic file and display with the program defined in -.Ev PAGER +.Ev PAGER (which defaults to .Xr more 1 ) . .It Ic passive @@ -1069,7 +1069,7 @@ on the command line. .Pp The following formats are valid syntax for an auto-fetch element: .Bl -tag -width "host:/file" -.It host:/file +.It host:/file .Dq Classic ftp format .It ftp://[user:password@]host[:port]/file @@ -1108,7 +1108,7 @@ connection creation and deletion. .Pp If .Ic file -contains a glob character and globbing is enabled, +contains a glob character and globbing is enabled, (see .Ic glob ) , then the equivalent of @@ -1347,7 +1347,7 @@ auto-login process. .El .Sh COMMAND LINE EDITING .Nm -supports interactive command line editing, via the +supports interactive command line editing, via the .Xr editline 3 library. It is enabled with the @@ -1392,7 +1392,7 @@ Port to use when connecting to gate-ftp server when is enabled. Default is port returned by a .Fn getservbyname -lookup of +lookup of .Dq ftpgate/tcp . .It Ev HOME For default location of a @@ -1428,7 +1428,7 @@ The command appeared in .Bx 4.2 . .Pp -Various features such as command line editing, context sensitive +Various features such as command line editing, context sensitive command and file completion, dynamic progress bar, automatic fetching of files, ftp and http URLs, and modification time preservation were implemented in diff --git a/usr.bin/gcore/gcore.1 b/usr.bin/gcore/gcore.1 index 04add22..dcc3376 100644 --- a/usr.bin/gcore/gcore.1 +++ b/usr.bin/gcore/gcore.1 @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ .Nm gcore .Nd get core images of running process .Sh SYNOPSIS -.Nm +.Nm .Op Fl s .Op Fl c Ar core .Op Ar exec @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Stop the process while gathering the core image, and resume it when done. This guarantees that the resulting core dump will be in a consistent state. The process is resumed even if it was already stopped. -The same effect can be achieved manually with +The same effect can be achieved manually with .Xr kill 1 . .El .Sh FILES @@ -94,5 +94,5 @@ to temporarily stop the target process. .Pp .Nm Gcore is not compatible with the original -.Bx 4.2 +.Bx 4.2 version. diff --git a/usr.bin/gencat/gencat.1 b/usr.bin/gencat/gencat.1 index 403267f..6bce2e1 100644 --- a/usr.bin/gencat/gencat.1 +++ b/usr.bin/gencat/gencat.1 @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ .Nm gencat .Nd NLS catalog compiler .Sh SYNOPSIS -.Nm +.Nm .Ar "output-file" .Ar "input-files..." .Sh DESCRIPTION @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ If the character following the backslash is not one of those specified, the backslash is ignored. .Pp The -.Nm +.Nm utility exits 0 on success, and >0 if an error occurs. .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr catclose 3 , diff --git a/usr.bin/getconf/getconf.1 b/usr.bin/getconf/getconf.1 index 2628909..d7388fc 100644 --- a/usr.bin/getconf/getconf.1 +++ b/usr.bin/getconf/getconf.1 @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ to so a .Ar system_var of -.Dq Li PATH +.Dq Li PATH is used.) .Pp The diff --git a/usr.bin/getopt/getopt.1 b/usr.bin/getopt/getopt.1 index d555b06..11a70b5 100644 --- a/usr.bin/getopt/getopt.1 +++ b/usr.bin/getopt/getopt.1 @@ -55,14 +55,14 @@ then fi set \-\- $args # You cannot use the set command with a backquoted getopt directly, -# since the exit code from getopt would be shadowed by those of set, +# since the exit code from getopt would be shadowed by those of set, # which is zero by definition. for i do case "$i" in \-a|\-b) - echo flag $i set; sflags="${i#-}$sflags"; + echo flag $i set; sflags="${i#-}$sflags"; shift;; \-o) echo oarg is "'"$2"'"; oarg="$2"; shift; @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ has. .Pp Arguments containing white space or embedded shell metacharacters generally will not survive intact; this looks easy to fix but -isn't. People trying to fix +isn't. People trying to fix .Nm or the example in this manpage should check the history of this file in diff --git a/usr.bin/gprof/gprof.1 b/usr.bin/gprof/gprof.1 index ef52fb7..7619046 100644 --- a/usr.bin/gprof/gprof.1 +++ b/usr.bin/gprof/gprof.1 @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ and establishes the relation between its symbol table and the call graph profile. The default graph profile file name is the name of the executable with the suffix -.Pa .gmon +.Pa .gmon appended. If more than one profile file is specified, the @@ -121,10 +121,10 @@ Find a minimal set of arcs that can be broken to eliminate all cycles with .Ar count or more members. Caution: the algorithm used to break cycles is exponential, -so using this option may cause +so using this option may cause .Nm to run for a very long time. -.It Fl e Ar name +.It Fl e Ar name Suppresses the printing of the graph profile entry for routine .Ar name and all its descendants @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Only one may be given with each .Fl e option. -.It Fl E Ar name +.It Fl E Ar name Suppresses the printing of the graph profile entry for routine .Ar name (and its descendants) as @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ above, and also excludes the time spent in .Fl E .Ar mcleanup is the default.) -.It Fl f Ar name +.It Fl f Ar name Prints the graph profile entry of only the specified routine .Ar name and its descendants. @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Only one may be given with each .Fl f option. -.It Fl F Ar name +.It Fl F Ar name Prints the graph profile entry of only the routine .Ar name and its descendants (as @@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ overrides the .Fl E option. -.It Fl k Ar fromname Ar toname +.It Fl k Ar fromname Ar toname Will delete any arcs from routine .Ar fromname to routine diff --git a/usr.bin/head/head.1 b/usr.bin/head/head.1 index a81025e..319aa2e 100644 --- a/usr.bin/head/head.1 +++ b/usr.bin/head/head.1 @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ .Sh DESCRIPTION This filter displays the first .Ar count -lines or +lines or .Ar bytes of each of the specified files, or of the standard input if no files are specified. diff --git a/usr.bin/hesinfo/hesinfo.1 b/usr.bin/hesinfo/hesinfo.1 index 226ff49..dbe62eb 100644 --- a/usr.bin/hesinfo/hesinfo.1 +++ b/usr.bin/hesinfo/hesinfo.1 @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ searching with .Aq Ar groupname . .It Cm grplist returns subgroups included in superset -defined by +defined by .Aq Ar groupname . .It Cm filsys returns file system type, export point, server, mount mode, and import point @@ -159,8 +159,8 @@ and returns information about the local cluster the workstation, specified by .Aq Ar "workstation\-name" . Included is information about the local file and print servers. -This information is accesses by -.Sy clusterinfo +This information is accesses by +.Sy clusterinfo at boot time. .It Cm sloc returns network name of service host for diff --git a/usr.bin/hexdump/hexdump.1 b/usr.bin/hexdump/hexdump.1 index b5c5c9d..6179cfc 100644 --- a/usr.bin/hexdump/hexdump.1 +++ b/usr.bin/hexdump/hexdump.1 @@ -90,14 +90,14 @@ implies this option. Display the input offset in hexadecimal, followed by eight space-separated, five column, zero-filled, two-byte units of input data, in unsigned decimal, per line. -.It Fl e Ar format_string +.It Fl e Ar format_string Specify a format string to be used for displaying data. -.It Fl f Ar format_file +.It Fl f Ar format_file Specify a file that contains one or more newline separated format strings. Empty lines and lines whose first non-blank character is a hash mark .Pf ( Cm \&# ) are ignored. -.It Fl n Ar length +.It Fl n Ar length Interpret only .Ar length bytes of input. @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ bytes of input. Display the input offset in hexadecimal, followed by eight space-separated, six column, zero-filled, two byte quantities of input data, in octal, per line. -.It Fl s Ar offset +.It Fl s Ar offset Skip .Ar offset bytes from the beginning of the input. @@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ described in the C standard are supported: .Nm Hexdump also supports the following additional conversion strings: .Bl -tag -width Fl -.It Cm \&_a Ns Op Cm dox +.It Cm \&_a Ns Op Cm dox Display the input offset, cumulative across input files, of the next byte to be displayed. The appended characters @@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ and .Cm x specify the display base as decimal, octal or hexadecimal respectively. -.It Cm \&_A Ns Op Cm dox +.It Cm \&_A Ns Op Cm dox Identical to the .Cm \&_a conversion string except that it is only performed @@ -268,12 +268,12 @@ are as follows: One byte counts only. .It Xo .Li \&%d , \&%i , \&%o , -.Li \&%u , \&%X , \&%x +.Li \&%u , \&%X , \&%x .Xc Four byte default, one, two and four byte counts supported. .It Xo .Li \&%E , \&%e , \&%f , -.Li \&%G , \&%g +.Li \&%G , \&%g .Xc Eight byte default, four byte counts supported. .El diff --git a/usr.bin/indent/indent.1 b/usr.bin/indent/indent.1 index dab2599..ab12d80 100644 --- a/usr.bin/indent/indent.1 +++ b/usr.bin/indent/indent.1 @@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ code. The default is Enables (disables) forcing of `else's to cuddle up to the immediately preceding `}'. The default is .Fl \&ce . -.It Fl \&ci Ns Ar n +.It Fl \&ci Ns Ar n Sets the continuation indent to be .Ar n . Continuation @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ is in effect. .Fl \&ci defaults to the same value as .Fl i . -.It Fl cli Ns Ar n +.It Fl cli Ns Ar n Causes case labels to be indented .Ar n tab stops to the right of the containing @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ statement. causes case labels to be indented half a tab stop. The default is .Fl cli0 . -.It Fl d Ns Ar n +.It Fl d Ns Ar n Controls the placement of comments which are not to the right of code. For example, .Fl \&d\&1 @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ left of code. Specifying the default .Fl \&d\&0 lines-up these comments with the code. See the section on comment indentation below. -.It Fl \&di Ns Ar n +.It Fl \&di Ns Ar n Specifies the indentation, in character positions, from a declaration keyword to the following identifier. The default is .Fl di16 . @@ -258,13 +258,13 @@ should be used. Block comments are then handled like box comments. The default is .Fl fcb . -.It Fl i Ns Ar n +.It Fl i Ns Ar n The number of spaces for one indentation level. The default is 8. .It Fl \&ip , nip Enables (disables) the indentation of parameter declarations from the left margin. The default is .Fl \&ip . -.It Fl l Ns Ar n +.It Fl l Ns Ar n Maximum length of an output line. The default is 78. .It Fl \&lp , nlp Lines-up code surrounded by parenthesis in continuation lines. If a line @@ -326,7 +326,7 @@ get rid of blank lines after declarations. Default: Causes .Nm to take its input from stdin and put its output to stdout. -.It Fl T Ns Ar typename +.It Fl T Ns Ar typename Adds .Ar typename to the list of type keywords. Names accumulate: @@ -397,13 +397,13 @@ line as possible. Blank lines break paragraphs. .Ss Comment indentation If a comment is on a line with code it is started in the `comment column', which is set by the -.Fl c Ns Ns Ar n +.Fl c Ns Ns Ar n command line parameter. Otherwise, the comment is started at .Ar n indentation levels less than where code is currently being placed, where .Ar n is specified by the -.Fl d Ns Ns Ar n +.Fl d Ns Ns Ar n command line parameter. If the code on a line extends past the comment column, the comment starts further to the right, and the right margin may be automatically extended in extreme cases. diff --git a/usr.bin/ipcrm/ipcrm.1 b/usr.bin/ipcrm/ipcrm.1 index f7529c8..9d59cc2 100644 --- a/usr.bin/ipcrm/ipcrm.1 +++ b/usr.bin/ipcrm/ipcrm.1 @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ .\" Copyright (c) 1994 Adam Glass .\" All rights reserved. -.\" +.\" .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions .\" are met: @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ .\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. .\" 2. The name of the Author may not be used to endorse or promote products .\" derived from this software without specific prior written permission. -.\" +.\" .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY Adam Glass ``AS IS'' AND .\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE @@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ .\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY .\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF .\" SUCH DAMAGE. -.\" +.\" .\" $FreeBSD$ .\"" .Dd August 8, 1994 @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ Remove the message queue associated with the id .Nm msqid from the system. .It Fl m Ar shmid -Mark the shared memory segment associated with id +Mark the shared memory segment associated with id .Nm shmid for removal. This marked segment will be destroyed after the last detach. @@ -60,11 +60,11 @@ Removes the semaphore set associated with id .Nm semid from the system. .It Fl Q Ar msgkey -Remove the message queue associated with key +Remove the message queue associated with key .Nm msgkey from the system. .It Fl M Ar shmkey -Mark the shared memory segment associated with key +Mark the shared memory segment associated with key .Nm shmkey for removal. This marked segment will be destroyed after the last detach. diff --git a/usr.bin/jot/jot.1 b/usr.bin/jot/jot.1 index a62e09a..bb4a3fe 100644 --- a/usr.bin/jot/jot.1 +++ b/usr.bin/jot/jot.1 @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ a function in APL. .Sh EXAMPLES The command .Dl jot 21 -1 1.00 -.Pp +.Pp prints 21 evenly spaced numbers increasing from -1 to 1. The .Tn ASCII diff --git a/usr.bin/kdump/kdump.1 b/usr.bin/kdump/kdump.1 index d3fefe2..22f13c9 100644 --- a/usr.bin/kdump/kdump.1 +++ b/usr.bin/kdump/kdump.1 @@ -58,13 +58,13 @@ The options are as follows: .Bl -tag -width Fl .It Fl d Display all numbers in decimal. -.It Fl f Ar file +.It Fl f Ar file Display the specified file instead of .Pa ktrace.out . .It Fl l Loop reading the trace file, once the end-of-file is reached, waiting for more data. -.It Fl m Ar maxdata +.It Fl m Ar maxdata Display at most .Ar maxdata bytes when decoding diff --git a/usr.bin/keylogin/keylogin.1 b/usr.bin/keylogin/keylogin.1 index 656e22e..f0fd8ed 100644 --- a/usr.bin/keylogin/keylogin.1 +++ b/usr.bin/keylogin/keylogin.1 @@ -22,8 +22,8 @@ key server process to be used by any secure network services, such as NFS. .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr chkey 1 , -.Xr keylogout 1 , +.Xr keylogout 1 , .Xr login 1 , .Xr publickey 5 , -.Xr keyserv 8 , -.Xr newkey 8 +.Xr keyserv 8 , +.Xr newkey 8 diff --git a/usr.bin/killall/killall.1 b/usr.bin/killall/killall.1 index 3c0ec4a..403bb4b 100644 --- a/usr.bin/killall/killall.1 +++ b/usr.bin/killall/killall.1 @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ List the names of the available signals and exit, like in .It Fl m Match the argument .Ar procname -as a (case insensitive) regular expression against the names +as a (case insensitive) regular expression against the names of processes found. CAUTION! This is dangerous, a single dot will match any process running under the effective UID of the caller. @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Limit potentially matching processes to those belonging to the specified .Ar user . .It Fl t Ar tty -Limit potentially matching processes to those running on +Limit potentially matching processes to those running on the specified .Ar tty . .It Fl c Ar procname @@ -104,11 +104,11 @@ the specified .Ar progname . .El .Sh ALL PROCESSES -Sending a signal to all processes with uid +Sending a signal to all processes with uid .Nm XYZ is already supported by -.Xr kill 1 . -So use +.Xr kill 1 . +So use .Xr kill 1 for this job (e.g. $ kill -TERM -1 or as root $ echo kill -TERM -1 | su -m <user>) diff --git a/usr.bin/ktrace/ktrace.1 b/usr.bin/ktrace/ktrace.1 index d879f81..194d292 100644 --- a/usr.bin/ktrace/ktrace.1 +++ b/usr.bin/ktrace/ktrace.1 @@ -85,23 +85,23 @@ Clear the trace points associated with the specified file or processes. .It Fl d Descendants; perform the operation for all current children of the designated processes. -.It Fl f Ar file +.It Fl f Ar file Log trace records to .Ar file instead of .Pa ktrace.out . -.It Fl g Ar pgid +.It Fl g Ar pgid Enable (disable) tracing on all processes in the process group (only one .Fl g flag is permitted). .It Fl i Inherit; pass the trace flags to all future children of the designated processes. -.It Fl p Ar pid +.It Fl p Ar pid Enable (disable) tracing on the indicated process id (only one .Fl p flag is permitted). -.It Fl t Ar trstr +.It Fl t Ar trstr The string argument represents the kernel trace points, one per letter. The following table equates the letters with the tracepoints: .Pp diff --git a/usr.bin/lam/lam.1 b/usr.bin/lam/lam.1 index 45af885..9c8d3d3 100644 --- a/usr.bin/lam/lam.1 +++ b/usr.bin/lam/lam.1 @@ -42,12 +42,12 @@ .Nm .Op Fl f Ar min . Ns Ar max .Op Fl s Ar sepstring -.Op Fl t Ar c +.Op Fl t Ar c .Ar .Nm .Op Fl p Ar min . Ns Ar max .Op Fl s Ar sepstring -.Op Fl t Ar c +.Op Fl t Ar c .Ar .Sh DESCRIPTION .Nm Lam diff --git a/usr.bin/lastcomm/lastcomm.1 b/usr.bin/lastcomm/lastcomm.1 index 86e6371..ca45877 100644 --- a/usr.bin/lastcomm/lastcomm.1 +++ b/usr.bin/lastcomm/lastcomm.1 @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Flags, as accumulated by the accounting facilities in the system. .It The command name under which the process was called. .It -The amount of +The amount of CPU .Pq Fl c , wall diff --git a/usr.bin/lex/lex.1 b/usr.bin/lex/lex.1 index 5237cc7..895002f 100644 --- a/usr.bin/lex/lex.1 +++ b/usr.bin/lex/lex.1 @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ A somewhat more complicated example: yyin = fopen( argv[0], "r" ); else yyin = stdin; - + yylex(); } @@ -705,7 +705,7 @@ a single blank, and throws away whitespace found at the end of a line: .PP If the action contains a '{', then the action spans till the balancing '}' is found, and the action may cross multiple lines. -.I flex +.I flex knows about C strings and comments and won't be fooled by braces found within them, but also allows actions to begin with .B %{ @@ -1903,7 +1903,7 @@ interactive to avoid problems due to waiting to fill buffers (see the discussion of the .B \-I flag below). A non-zero value -in the macro invocation marks the buffer as interactive, a zero +in the macro invocation marks the buffer as interactive, a zero value as non-interactive. Note that use of this macro overrides .B %option interactive , .B %option always-interactive @@ -2123,7 +2123,7 @@ The result is large but fast. This option is equivalent to generates a "help" summary of .I flex's options to -.I stdout +.I stdout and then exits. .B \-? and @@ -2427,7 +2427,7 @@ and 8-bit scanners. specifies that you want flex to generate a C++ scanner class. See the section on Generating C++ Scanners below for details. -.TP +.TP .B \-C[aefFmr] controls the degree of table compression and, more generally, trade-offs between small scanners and fast scanners. @@ -2885,7 +2885,7 @@ It is a particularly expensive option. Getting rid of backing up is messy and often may be an enormous amount of work for a complicated scanner. In principal, one begins by using the -.B \-b +.B \-b flag to generate a .I lex.backup file. For example, on the input @@ -3155,7 +3155,7 @@ one which doesn't include a newline: Compiled with .B \-Cf, this is about as fast as one can get a -.I flex +.I flex scanner to go for this particular problem. .PP A final note: @@ -3481,7 +3481,7 @@ for the other. .PP IMPORTANT: the present form of the scanning class is .I experimental -and may change considerably between major releases. +and may change considerably between major releases. .SH INCOMPATIBILITIES WITH LEX AND POSIX .I flex is a rewrite of the AT&T Unix diff --git a/usr.bin/limits/limits.1 b/usr.bin/limits/limits.1 index 0040af0..c0f8751 100644 --- a/usr.bin/limits/limits.1 +++ b/usr.bin/limits/limits.1 @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ resource limits. If specific limits settings follow this switch, both soft and hard limits are affected until overridden later with either the .Fl S -or +or .Fl H flags. .Fl e @@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ as well that apply to the 'news' account, you might use: .Pp .Dl eval `limits -U news -aBec 0` .Pp -As with the +As with the .Xr setrlimit 2 call, only the superuser may raise process "hard" resource limits. Non-root users may, however, lower them or change "soft" resource limits diff --git a/usr.bin/locate/locate/locate.1 b/usr.bin/locate/locate/locate.1 index aa958b6..b261f7b 100644 --- a/usr.bin/locate/locate/locate.1 +++ b/usr.bin/locate/locate/locate.1 @@ -43,14 +43,14 @@ .Nm .Op Fl Scims .Op Fl l Ar limit -.Op Fl d Ar database +.Op Fl d Ar database .Ar pattern ... .Sh DESCRIPTION The .Nm program searches a database for all pathnames which match the specified .Ar pattern . -The database is recomputed periodically (usually weekly or daily), +The database is recomputed periodically (usually weekly or daily), and contains the pathnames of all files which are publicly accessible. .Pp @@ -99,9 +99,9 @@ Suppress normal output; instead print a count of matching file names. Search in .Ar database instead the default file name database. -Multiple +Multiple .Fl d -options are allowed. Each additional +options are allowed. Each additional .Fl d option adds the specified database to the list of databases to be searched. @@ -117,9 +117,9 @@ $ locate -d $HOME/lib/mydb: foo .Pp will first search string .Dq foo -in +in .Pa $HOME/lib/mydb -and then in +and then in .Pa /var/db/locate.database . .Bd -literal $ locate -d $HOME/lib/mydb::/cdrom/locate.database foo @@ -127,11 +127,11 @@ $ locate -d $HOME/lib/mydb::/cdrom/locate.database foo .Pp will first search string .Dq foo -in +in .Pa $HOME/lib/mydb -and then in +and then in .Pa /var/db/locate.database -and then in +and then in .Pa /cdrom/locate.database . .Bd -literal $ locate -d db1 -d db2 -d db3 pattern @@ -142,35 +142,35 @@ is the same as $ locate -d db1:db2:db3 pattern .Ed .Pp -or +or .Bd -literal -.Dq $ locate -d db1:db2 -d db3 pattern . +.Dq $ locate -d db1:db2 -d db3 pattern . .Ed .Pp If -.Ar - +.Ar - is given as the database name, standard input will be read instead. -For example, you can compress your database -and use: +For example, you can compress your database +and use: .Bd -literal $ zcat database.gz | locate -d - pattern .Ed .Pp This might be useful on machines with a fast CPU and little RAM and slow -I/O. Note: you can only use +I/O. Note: you can only use .Ar one pattern for stdin. .It Fl i Ignore case distinctions in both the pattern and the database. .It Fl l Ar number -Limit output to +Limit output to .Ar number of file names and exit. .It Fl m -Use -.Xr mmap 2 -instead of the -.Xr stdio 3 +Use +.Xr mmap 2 +instead of the +.Xr stdio 3 library. This is the default behavior. Usually faster in most cases. @@ -192,8 +192,8 @@ Script that starts the database rebuild .Sh ENVIRONMENT .Bl -tag -width LOCATE_PATH -compact .It Pa LOCATE_PATH -path to the locate database if set and not empty, ignored if the -.Fl d +path to the locate database if set and not empty, ignored if the +.Fl d option was specified. .El .Sh SEE ALSO @@ -213,10 +213,10 @@ option was specified. .Sh BUGS The .Nm -program may fail to list some files that are present, or may +program may fail to list some files that are present, or may list files that have been removed from the system. This is because locate only reports files that are present in the database, which is -typically only regenerated once a week by the +typically only regenerated once a week by the .Pa /etc/periodic/weekly/310.locate script. Use .Xr find 1 @@ -224,18 +224,18 @@ to locate files that are of a more transitory nature. .Pp The .Nm -database was built by user +database was built by user .Dq nobody . .Xr find 1 skips directories, -which are not readable for user -.Dq nobody , +which are not readable for user +.Dq nobody , group .Dq nobody , or world. E.g. if your HOME directory is not world-readable, all your -files are +files are .Ar not in the database. .Pp @@ -244,13 +244,13 @@ The database is not byte order independent. It is not possible to share the databases between machines with different byte order. -The current +The current .Nm implementation understand databases in host byte order or -network byte order if both architectures use the same integer size. +network byte order if both architectures use the same integer size. So you can read on a .Fx Ns /i386 -machine +machine (little endian) a locate database which was built on SunOS/sparc machine (big endian, net). diff --git a/usr.bin/lock/lock.1 b/usr.bin/lock/lock.1 index 05ae530..60348a5 100644 --- a/usr.bin/lock/lock.1 +++ b/usr.bin/lock/lock.1 @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ Don't use a timeout value. Terminal will be locked forever. .It Fl p A password is not requested, instead the user's current login password is used. -.It Fl t Ar timeout +.It Fl t Ar timeout The time limit (default 15 minutes) is changed to .Ar timeout minutes. diff --git a/usr.bin/lockf/lockf.1 b/usr.bin/lockf/lockf.1 index 4a9eb65..cd81f41 100644 --- a/usr.bin/lockf/lockf.1 +++ b/usr.bin/lockf/lockf.1 @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ unless the .Fl k option is specified. BSD-style locking is used, as described in .Xr flock 2 ; -the mere existence of the +the mere existence of the .Ar file is not considered to constitute a lock. .Pp diff --git a/usr.bin/logger/logger.1 b/usr.bin/logger/logger.1 index 55867a4..e9bfd98 100644 --- a/usr.bin/logger/logger.1 +++ b/usr.bin/logger/logger.1 @@ -74,13 +74,13 @@ Log the process id of the logger process with each line. .It Fl s Log the message to standard error, as well as the system log. -.It Fl f Ar file +.It Fl f Ar file Log the specified file. -.It Fl h Ar host -Send the message to the remote system +.It Fl h Ar host +Send the message to the remote system .Ar host instead of logging it locally. -.It Fl p Ar pri +.It Fl p Ar pri Enter the message with the specified priority. The priority may be specified numerically or as a ``facility.level'' pair. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ level in the .Ar local3 facility. The default is ``user.notice.'' -.It Fl t Ar tag +.It Fl t Ar tag Mark every line in the log with the specified .Ar tag . .It Ar message diff --git a/usr.bin/login/login.1 b/usr.bin/login/login.1 index 312cad8..f6367f7 100644 --- a/usr.bin/login/login.1 +++ b/usr.bin/login/login.1 @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ file. .Pp If the file .Pa /etc/skeykeys -exists, +exists, .Nm will offer S/key password validation if the user has an entry in the file. .Pa /etc/skey.access diff --git a/usr.bin/login/login.access.5 b/usr.bin/login/login.access.5 index 18685e8..d5af0ee 100644 --- a/usr.bin/login/login.access.5 +++ b/usr.bin/login/login.access.5 @@ -11,15 +11,15 @@ .Sh DESCRIPTION The .Nm -file specifies (user, host) combinations and/or (user, tty) +file specifies (user, host) combinations and/or (user, tty) combinations for which a login will be either accepted or refused. .Pp -When someone logs in, the +When someone logs in, the .Nm is scanned for the first entry that matches the (user, host) combination, or, in case of non-networked logins, the first entry that matches the (user, tty) combination. The -permissions field of that table entry determines whether the login will +permissions field of that table entry determines whether the login will be accepted or refused. .Pp Each line of the login access control table has three fields separated by a diff --git a/usr.bin/look/look.1 b/usr.bin/look/look.1 index e87678e..9d5d722 100644 --- a/usr.bin/look/look.1 +++ b/usr.bin/look/look.1 @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ .Ar string .Op Ar .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm utility displays any lines in .Ar file diff --git a/usr.bin/m4/m4.1 b/usr.bin/m4/m4.1 index 3dfef30..38868b5 100644 --- a/usr.bin/m4/m4.1 +++ b/usr.bin/m4/m4.1 @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ .Fl D Ns Ar name Ns Op Ar =value .Oc .Op Fl U Ns Ar name -.Op Ar filename +.Op Ar filename \|.\|.\|. .Sh DESCRIPTION The diff --git a/usr.bin/mail/mail.1 b/usr.bin/mail/mail.1 index 7d9b511..07b7ca6 100644 --- a/usr.bin/mail/mail.1 +++ b/usr.bin/mail/mail.1 @@ -135,8 +135,8 @@ Next, the commands in the user's personal command file .Pa ~/.mailrc are executed. .Nm -then examines its command line options to determine whether a -new message is to be sent, or whether an existing mailbox is to +then examines its command line options to determine whether a +new message is to be sent, or whether an existing mailbox is to be read. .Ss Sending mail To send a message to one or more people, diff --git a/usr.bin/make/make.1 b/usr.bin/make/make.1 index da98e68..9b3171b 100644 --- a/usr.bin/make/make.1 +++ b/usr.bin/make/make.1 @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ .Sh DESCRIPTION .Nm Make is a program designed to simplify the maintenance of other programs. -Its input is a list of specifications +Its input is a list of specifications describing dependency relationships between the generation of files and programs. The first of @@ -593,7 +593,7 @@ The colon may be escaped with a backslash .No \&/ Op Cm 1g .Xc .Sm on -The +The .Cm C modifier is just like the .Cm S diff --git a/usr.bin/minigzip/minigzip.1 b/usr.bin/minigzip/minigzip.1 index 02f347d..c13857f 100644 --- a/usr.bin/minigzip/minigzip.1 +++ b/usr.bin/minigzip/minigzip.1 @@ -43,14 +43,14 @@ compression and decompression of individual files, as well as streaming compression and decompression via standard input and output. .Pp -The default operation is compression, decompression can be +The default operation is compression, decompression can be selected by supplying the .Fl d flag on the commandline. .Pp If any .Ar file -arguments are supplied, the operation is performed on each file +arguments are supplied, the operation is performed on each file separately. Compression replaces the original file with one having a .Pa .gz suffix. Decompression will remove a @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ If no .Ar file arguments are supplied, .Nm -reads from standard input and writes the results of the operation +reads from standard input and writes the results of the operation to standard output. .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr gzip 1 diff --git a/usr.bin/mkdep/mkdep.1 b/usr.bin/mkdep/mkdep.1 index d2c0a93..ef96bcc 100644 --- a/usr.bin/mkdep/mkdep.1 +++ b/usr.bin/mkdep/mkdep.1 @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ so that multiple .Nm Ns 's may be run from a single Makefile. .It Fl f -Write the include file dependencies to +Write the include file dependencies to .Ar file , instead of the default ``.depend''. .It Fl p diff --git a/usr.bin/mkfifo/mkfifo.1 b/usr.bin/mkfifo/mkfifo.1 index 1cdb12b..90fe29d 100644 --- a/usr.bin/mkfifo/mkfifo.1 +++ b/usr.bin/mkfifo/mkfifo.1 @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ If a symbolic mode is specified, the op symbols .Dq - (hyphen) are interpreted relative to an assumed initial mode of .Dq a=rw -(read and write permissions for all). +(read and write permissions for all). .El .Pp If the diff --git a/usr.bin/mklocale/mklocale.1 b/usr.bin/mklocale/mklocale.1 index de2a86f..6bf91a8 100644 --- a/usr.bin/mklocale/mklocale.1 +++ b/usr.bin/mklocale/mklocale.1 @@ -154,10 +154,10 @@ systems. .It Dv VARIABLE This keyword must be followed by a single tab or space character, after which encoding specific data is placed. -Currently only the +Currently only the .Dv "EUC" encoding requires variable data. -See +See .Xr euc 4 for further details. .It Dv INVALID diff --git a/usr.bin/mktemp/mktemp.1 b/usr.bin/mktemp/mktemp.1 index 9a01402..08a4d33 100644 --- a/usr.bin/mktemp/mktemp.1 +++ b/usr.bin/mktemp/mktemp.1 @@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ A .Nm utility appeared in .Ox 2.1 . -This implementation was written independently based on the +This implementation was written independently based on the .Ox man page, and first appeared in diff --git a/usr.bin/msgs/msgs.1 b/usr.bin/msgs/msgs.1 index e0a465c..b5d40d2 100644 --- a/usr.bin/msgs/msgs.1 +++ b/usr.bin/msgs/msgs.1 @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ with the .Fl c option should be placed in .Pa /etc/periodic/daily -(see +(see .Xr periodic 8 ) to run every night. This will remove all messages over 21 days old. A different expiration may be specified on the command line to override diff --git a/usr.bin/mt/mt.1 b/usr.bin/mt/mt.1 index bcf058c..657dd5f 100644 --- a/usr.bin/mt/mt.1 +++ b/usr.bin/mt/mt.1 @@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ uses the device returns a 0 exit status when the operation(s) were successful, 1 if the command was unrecognized, and 2 if an operation failed. .Pp -The following density table was taken from the +The following density table was taken from the .Sq Historical sequential access density codes table (A-1) in Revision 11 of the SCSI-3 Stream Device Commands (SSC) working draft, dated November 11, 1997. diff --git a/usr.bin/ncplogin/ncplogin.1 b/usr.bin/ncplogin/ncplogin.1 index 1c60600..8fb1530 100644 --- a/usr.bin/ncplogin/ncplogin.1 +++ b/usr.bin/ncplogin/ncplogin.1 @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ Permanent connections will stay connected even if no applications use them. This allows users to run different ncp* programs without specifying a file server and user to use. Established connections can be destroyed with the -.Xr ncplogout 1 +.Xr ncplogout 1 command. .Pp Upper case options described in this manual @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ ncp* programs try to find a suitable connection in the following order: .Bl -enum -offset indent .It Try to find a connection owned by the user. -If there is more than one such +If there is more than one such connection, try to determine which one is primary. The primary flag is set with the .Fl D diff --git a/usr.bin/ncplogin/ncplogout.1 b/usr.bin/ncplogin/ncplogout.1 index 590a305..86e7bda 100644 --- a/usr.bin/ncplogin/ncplogout.1 +++ b/usr.bin/ncplogin/ncplogout.1 @@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ command to be closed. If the connection is busy (i.e. used by other processes) it will be closed when the last process using it is terminated. This command is similar to the -.Tn DOS +.Tn DOS logout.exe command. .Pp The options are: diff --git a/usr.bin/netstat/netstat.1 b/usr.bin/netstat/netstat.1 index a959293..256292a 100644 --- a/usr.bin/netstat/netstat.1 +++ b/usr.bin/netstat/netstat.1 @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ With either interface display (option .Fl i or an interval, as described below), show the number of dropped packets. -.It Fl f Ar address_family +.It Fl f Ar address_family Limit statistics or address control block reports to those of the specified .Ar address family . @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ By default, show the IP Multicast virtual-interface and routing tables. If the .Fl s option is also present, show multicast routing statistics. -.It Fl I Ar interface +.It Fl I Ar interface Show information about the specified interface; used with a .Ar wait @@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ Show network addresses and ports as numbers (normally interprets addresses and ports and attempts to display them symbolically). This option may be used with any of the display formats. -.It Fl p Ar protocol +.It Fl p Ar protocol Show statistics about .Ar protocol , which is either a well-known name for a protocol or an alias for it. Some @@ -325,21 +325,21 @@ and manual pages. The mapping between letters and flags is: .Bl -column XXXX RTF_BLACKHOLE -1 RTF_PROTO1 Protocol specific routing flag #1 -2 RTF_PROTO2 Protocol specific routing flag #2 +1 RTF_PROTO1 Protocol specific routing flag #1 +2 RTF_PROTO2 Protocol specific routing flag #2 3 RTF_PROTO3 Protocol specific routing flag #3 -B RTF_BLACKHOLE Just discard pkts (during updates) +B RTF_BLACKHOLE Just discard pkts (during updates) b RTF_BROADCAST The route represents a broadcast address -C RTF_CLONING Generate new routes on use +C RTF_CLONING Generate new routes on use c RTF_PRCLONING Protocol-specified generate new routes on use -D RTF_DYNAMIC Created dynamically (by redirect) +D RTF_DYNAMIC Created dynamically (by redirect) G RTF_GATEWAY Destination requires forwarding by intermediary -H RTF_HOST Host entry (net otherwise) +H RTF_HOST Host entry (net otherwise) L RTF_LLINFO Valid protocol to link address translation -M RTF_MODIFIED Modified dynamically (by redirect) -R RTF_REJECT Host or net unreachable -S RTF_STATIC Manually added -U RTF_UP Route usable +M RTF_MODIFIED Modified dynamically (by redirect) +R RTF_REJECT Host or net unreachable +S RTF_STATIC Manually added +U RTF_UP Route usable W RTF_WASCLONED Route was generated as a result of cloning X RTF_XRESOLVE External daemon translates proto to link address .El diff --git a/usr.bin/newkey/newkey.8 b/usr.bin/newkey/newkey.8 index 1cbf9f2..aa9e42c 100644 --- a/usr.bin/newkey/newkey.8 +++ b/usr.bin/newkey/newkey.8 @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ .Nm .Fl u Ar username .Sh DESCRIPTION -.Nm Newkey +.Nm Newkey is normally run by the network administrator on the Network Interface Service (\s-1NIS\s0) @@ -25,21 +25,21 @@ NFS\s0. .Pp .Nm Newkey will prompt for the login password of the given username and then -create a new public/secret key pair in +create a new public/secret key pair in .Pa /etc/publickey encrypted with the login password of the given user. .Pp Use of this program is -not required: users may create their own keys using +not required: users may create their own keys using .Xr chkey 1 . .Sh OPTIONS .Bl -tag -width indent .It Fl h Ar hostname -Create a new public key for the super-user at the given hostname. +Create a new public key for the super-user at the given hostname. Prompts for the root password of the given hostname. .It Fl u Ar username Create a new public key for the given username. -Prompts for the +Prompts for the NIS password of the given username. .El @@ -52,6 +52,6 @@ password of the given username. The Network Information Service (\s-1NIS\s0) was formerly known as Sun Yellow Pages -(\s-1YP\s0). +(\s-1YP\s0). The functionality of the two remains the same; only the name has changed. diff --git a/usr.bin/nice/nice.1 b/usr.bin/nice/nice.1 index 9ad70c9..5e2a180 100644 --- a/usr.bin/nice/nice.1 +++ b/usr.bin/nice/nice.1 @@ -52,21 +52,21 @@ at a low priority. If .Fl Ns Ar number is not given, -.Nm +.Nm assumes the value 10. The priority is a value in the range -20 to 20. -The default priority is 0, priority 20 is the lowest possible. +The default priority is 0, priority 20 is the lowest possible. .Nm Nice will execute .Ar command at priority .Ar number relative to the priority -of +of .Nm . Higher priorities than the current process priority can only requested by the -super-user. +super-user. Negative numbers are expressed as .Fl - Ns Ar number . .Pp @@ -83,15 +83,15 @@ manual page. .Sh EXAMPLES $ nice -5 date .Pp -Execute command -.Sq date +Execute command +.Sq date at priority 5 assuming the priority of the shell is 0. .Pp # nice -16 nice --35 date .Pp -Execute command -.Sq date +Execute command +.Sq date at priority -19 assuming the priority of the shell is 0 and you are the super-user. .Sh SEE ALSO diff --git a/usr.bin/nl/nl.1 b/usr.bin/nl/nl.1 index f499eaa..2291ba9 100644 --- a/usr.bin/nl/nl.1 +++ b/usr.bin/nl/nl.1 @@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ The default is 6. .El .Sh DIAGNOSTICS -The +The .Nm utility exits 0 on success, and >0 if an error occurs. .Sh SEE ALSO diff --git a/usr.bin/nm/nm.1 b/usr.bin/nm/nm.1 index deadd0e..3b09f2d 100644 --- a/usr.bin/nm/nm.1 +++ b/usr.bin/nm/nm.1 @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ The symbol table (name list) of each object in .Ar file Ns (s) is displayed. If a library (archive) is given, -.Nm +.Nm displays a list for each object archive member. If diff --git a/usr.bin/objformat/objformat.1 b/usr.bin/objformat/objformat.1 index a6d0d29..ffd0f24 100644 --- a/usr.bin/objformat/objformat.1 +++ b/usr.bin/objformat/objformat.1 @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ and .Pp If invoked by any other name, .Nm prog -is expanded to +is expanded to .Pa /usr/libexec/<objformat>/prog and executed. .Sh DIAGNOSTICS @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ If the environment variable .Ev OBJFORMAT_PATH is set, its value is used as the base path to .Nm prog . -The default is +The default is .Pa /usr/libexec . .El .Sh FILES @@ -84,13 +84,13 @@ If present, specifies the object file format to use. Syntax is .Sh HISTORY The .Nm -command appeared in +command appeared in .Fx 3.0 . .Sh AUTHORS .An -nosplit .Nm -was written by +was written by .An Peter Wemm Aq peter@netplex.com.au . -This manual page was written by +This manual page was written by .An David O'Brien Aq obrien@NUXI.com . .\" .Sh BUGS diff --git a/usr.bin/passwd/passwd.1 b/usr.bin/passwd/passwd.1 index fe4f05c..abd51e8 100644 --- a/usr.bin/passwd/passwd.1 +++ b/usr.bin/passwd/passwd.1 @@ -50,14 +50,14 @@ .Op Fl o .Sh DESCRIPTION .Nm Passwd -changes the user's local, Kerberos, or NIS password. +changes the user's local, Kerberos, or NIS password. If the user is not the super-user, .Nm first prompts for the current password and will not continue unless the correct password is entered. .Pp When entering the new password, the characters entered do not echo, in order to -avoid the password being seen by a passer-by. +avoid the password being seen by a passer-by. .Nm prompts for the new password twice in order to detect typing errors. .Pp @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ is used to update the password databases. .Pp .El When changing local or NIS password, the next password change date -is set according to +is set according to .Dq passwordtime capability in the user's login class. .Pp @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ has built-in support for NIS. If a user exists in the NIS password database but does not exist locally, .Nm -automatically switches into +automatically switches into .Dq yppasswd mode. If the specified @@ -148,12 +148,12 @@ When NIS is enabled, the .Fl l flag can be used to force .Nm -into +into .Dq local only mode. This flag can be used to change the entry for a local user when an NIS user exists with the same login name. -For example, you will sometimes find entries for system +For example, you will sometimes find entries for system .Dq placeholder users such as .Pa bin @@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ option and .Nm is unable to determine the name of the NIS master server (possibly because the local domainname isn't set), the name of the NIS master is assumed to -be +be .Dq localhost . This can be overridden with the .Fl h @@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ flag is of limited practical use but is useful for testing. .Bl -tag -width /etc/master.passwd -compact .It Pa /etc/master.passwd The user database -.It Pa /etc/passwd +.It Pa /etc/passwd A Version 7 format password file .It Pa /etc/passwd.XXXXXX Temporary copy of the password file diff --git a/usr.bin/paste/paste.1 b/usr.bin/paste/paste.1 index fef232b..467bd82 100644 --- a/usr.bin/paste/paste.1 +++ b/usr.bin/paste/paste.1 @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ of empty lines. .Pp The options are as follows: .Bl -tag -width Fl -.It Fl d Ar list +.It Fl d Ar list Use one or more of the provided characters to replace the newline characters instead of the default tab. The characters in diff --git a/usr.bin/pr/pr.1 b/usr.bin/pr/pr.1 index 56ef444..3ad64e4 100644 --- a/usr.bin/pr/pr.1 +++ b/usr.bin/pr/pr.1 @@ -126,11 +126,11 @@ In the following option descriptions, column, lines, offset, page, and width are positive decimal integers and gap is a nonnegative decimal integer. .Bl -tag -width 4n .It Ar \&+page -Begin output at page number +Begin output at page number .Ar page of the formatted input. .It Fl Ar column -Produce output that is +Produce output that is .Ar columns wide (default is 1) that is written vertically down each column in the order in which the text @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ When used with .Fl t , the minimum number of lines is used to display the output. .It Fl a -Modify the effect of the +Modify the effect of the .Fl column option so that the columns are filled across the page in a round-robin order (e.g., when column is 2, the first input line heads column @@ -169,15 +169,15 @@ found in the input. Expand each input .Em <tab> to the next greater column -position specified by the formula +position specified by the formula .Ar n*gap+1 , -where +where .Em n is an integer > 0. If .Ar gap is zero or is omitted the default is 8. -All +All .Em <tab> characters in the input are expanded into the appropriate number of @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ sequence of .Em <newline> characters. .It Fl h Ar header -Use the string +Use the string .Ar header to replace the .Ar file name @@ -231,12 +231,12 @@ Use specified as argument instead of one found in environment. Use "C" to reset locale to default. .It Fl l Ar lines -Override the 66 line default and reset the page length to +Override the 66 line default and reset the page length to .Ar lines . If .Ar lines is not greater than the sum of both the header and trailer -depths (in lines), the +depths (in lines), the .Nm utility suppresses output of both the header and trailer, as if the .Fl t @@ -262,7 +262,7 @@ are assumed. Provide .Ar width digit line numbering. -The default for +The default for .Ar width , if not specified, is 5. The number occupies the first @@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ Separate text columns by the single character .Ar char instead of by the appropriate number of .Em <space>s -(default for +(default for .Ar char is the .Em <tab> diff --git a/usr.bin/printf/printf.1 b/usr.bin/printf/printf.1 index f276aa4..0e44abc 100644 --- a/usr.bin/printf/printf.1 +++ b/usr.bin/printf/printf.1 @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Write a <vertical tab> character. Write a <single quote> character. .It Cm \e\e Write a backslash character. -.It Cm \e Ns Ar num +.It Cm \e Ns Ar num Write an 8-bit character whose .Tn ASCII value is the 1-, 2-, or 3-digit @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ followed by an optional digit string giving a which specifies the number of digits to appear after the decimal point, for .Cm e -and +and .Cm f formats, or the maximum number of characters to be printed from a string; if the digit string is missing, the precision is treated @@ -291,6 +291,6 @@ hexadecimal character constants were deliberately not provided. .Pp The escape sequence \e000 is the string terminator. When present in the .Ar format , -the +the .Ar format will be truncated at the \e000 character. diff --git a/usr.bin/quota/quota.1 b/usr.bin/quota/quota.1 index 7e9b124..9cece56 100644 --- a/usr.bin/quota/quota.1 +++ b/usr.bin/quota/quota.1 @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ By default only the user quotas are printed. The following options are available: .Bl -tag -width indent .It Fl g -Print group quotas for the group +Print group quotas for the group of which the user is a member. The optional .Fl u diff --git a/usr.bin/renice/renice.8 b/usr.bin/renice/renice.8 index 12a906a..9ff54a7 100644 --- a/usr.bin/renice/renice.8 +++ b/usr.bin/renice/renice.8 @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ .Oc .Sh DESCRIPTION .Nm Renice -alters the +alters the scheduling priority of one or more running processes. The following .Ar who @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ parameters are interpreted as process ID's, process group ID's, or user names. .Nm Renice Ns 'ing a process group causes all processes in the process group -to have their scheduling priority altered. +to have their scheduling priority altered. .Nm Renice Ns 'ing a user causes all processes owned by the user to have their scheduling priority altered. @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Options supported by .Nm : .Bl -tag -width Ds .It Fl g -Force +Force .Ar who parameters to be interpreted as process group ID's. .It Fl u diff --git a/usr.bin/rpcgen/rpcgen.1 b/usr.bin/rpcgen/rpcgen.1 index ad118cd..c0e355c 100644 --- a/usr.bin/rpcgen/rpcgen.1 +++ b/usr.bin/rpcgen/rpcgen.1 @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ is a language similar to C known as Language (Remote Procedure Call Language). .Pp .Nm Rpcgen -is normally used as in the first synopsis where +is normally used as in the first synopsis where it takes an input file and generates three output files. If the .Ar infile @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ The .Fl \&Ss and .Fl \&Sm -options generate sample client, server and makefile, respectively. +options generate sample client, server and makefile, respectively. The .Fl a option generates all files, including sample files. @@ -106,14 +106,14 @@ then the client side sample file is written to the server side sample file to .Pa proto_server.c and the sample makefile to -.Pa makefile.proto . +.Pa makefile.proto . .Pp The server created can be started both by the port monitors (for example, .Xr inetd 8 ) or by itself. When it is started by a port monitor, -it creates servers only for the transport for which +it creates servers only for the transport for which the file descriptor .Em 0 was passed. @@ -159,20 +159,20 @@ a pointer to the input and output arguments, .It the size of these routines. .El -A server can use the dispatch table to check authorization -and then to execute the service routine; +A server can use the dispatch table to check authorization +and then to execute the service routine; a client library may use it to deal with the details of storage management and XDR data conversion. .Pp -The other three synopses shown above are used when +The other three synopses shown above are used when one does not want to generate all the output files, but only a particular one. See the .Sx EXAMPLES -section below for examples of +section below for examples of .Nm usage. -When +When .Nm is executed with the .Fl s @@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ This option may be specified more than once. .It Fl h Compile into C data-definitions (a header). .Fl T -option can be used in conjunction to produce a +option can be used in conjunction to produce a header which supports .Tn RPC dispatch tables. @@ -307,8 +307,8 @@ Such servers can be self-started or can be started by When the server is self-started, it backgrounds itself by default. A special define symbol .Em RPC_SVC_FG -can be used to run the -server process in foreground, or the user may simply compile without +can be used to run the +server process in foreground, or the user may simply compile without the .Fl I option. @@ -316,12 +316,12 @@ option. If there are no pending client requests, the .Nm inetd servers exit after 120 seconds (default). -The default can be changed with the +The default can be changed with the .Fl K option. All the error messages for .Nm inetd -servers +servers are always logged with .Xr syslog 3 . .\" .IP @@ -340,7 +340,7 @@ after servicing a request before exiting. That interval can be changed using the .Fl K flag. -To create a server that exits immediately upon servicing a request, +To create a server that exits immediately upon servicing a request, use .Fl K Ar 0 . To create a server that never exits, the appropriate argument is @@ -368,21 +368,21 @@ Compile into server-side stubs, but do not generate a .Qq main routine. -This option is useful for doing callback-routines -and for users who need to write their own +This option is useful for doing callback-routines +and for users who need to write their own .Qq main routine to do initialization. .It Fl M Generate multithread-safe stubs for passing arguments and results between rpcgen generated code and user written code. -This option is useful +This option is useful for users who want to use threads in their code. However, the .Xr rpc_svc_calls 3 functions are not yet MT-safe, which means that rpcgen generated server-side code will not be MT-safe. .It Fl N -This option allows procedures to have multiple arguments. +This option allows procedures to have multiple arguments. It also uses the style of parameter passing that closely resembles C. So, when passing an argument to a remote procedure, you do not have to pass a pointer to the argument, but can pass the argument itself. @@ -416,10 +416,10 @@ standard output is used .Fl \&Sm , .Fl \&Ss , and -.Fl t +.Fl t modes only). .It Fl s Ar nettype -Compile into server-side stubs for all the +Compile into server-side stubs for all the transports belonging to the class .Ar nettype . The supported classes are @@ -431,8 +431,8 @@ The supported classes are .Em datagram_v , .Em tcp , and -.Em udp -(see +.Em udp +(see .Xr rpc 3 for the meanings associated with these classes). This option may be specified more than once. @@ -455,7 +455,7 @@ Generate the code to support .Tn RPC dispatch tables. .Pp -The options +The options .Fl c , .Fl h , .Fl l , @@ -465,7 +465,7 @@ The options .Fl \&Sm , .Fl \&Ss , and -.Fl t +.Fl t are used exclusively to generate a particular type of file, while the options .Fl D @@ -473,7 +473,7 @@ and .Fl T are global and can be used with the other options. .It Fl Y Ar pathname -Give the name of the directory where +Give the name of the directory where .Nm will start looking for the C-preprocessor. .El @@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ to the standard output. .Pp To send the test version of the .Fl D Ns Ar TEST , -server side stubs for +server side stubs for all the transport belonging to the class .Ar datagram_n to standard output, use: diff --git a/usr.bin/rpcinfo/rpcinfo.8 b/usr.bin/rpcinfo/rpcinfo.8 index 9976a14..bfff902 100644 --- a/usr.bin/rpcinfo/rpcinfo.8 +++ b/usr.bin/rpcinfo/rpcinfo.8 @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ server and reports what it finds. .Pp In the first synopsis, .Nm -lists all the registered RPC services with +lists all the registered RPC services with .Nm rpcbind on .Ar host . @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ If .Fl s is used, the information is displayed in a concise format. .Pp -In the second synopsis, +In the second synopsis, .Nm lists all the RPC services registered with .Nm rpcbind , @@ -107,14 +107,14 @@ attempts to find all the registered version numbers for the specified .Ar prognum by calling version 0, -which is presumed not to exist; +which is presumed not to exist; if it does exist, .Nm attempts to obtain this information by calling an extremely high version number instead, and attempts to call each registered version. -Note: -the version number is required for +Note: +the version number is required for .Fl b and .Fl d @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ environment variable, or if that is unset or empty, the transport in the .Xr netconfig 5 database is used. -This is a generic option, +This is a generic option, and can be used in conjunction with other options as shown in the .Sx SYNOPSIS . @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ shown in the Use .Ar serv_address as the (universal) address for the service on -.Ar transport +.Ar transport to ping procedure 0 of the specified .Ar prognum @@ -150,11 +150,11 @@ option is required with the .Fl a option. .Pp -If +If .Ar versnum is not specified, .Nm -tries to ping all +tries to ping all available version numbers for that program number. This option avoids calls to remote .Nm rpcbind @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ Display a list of entries with a given .Ar prognum and .Ar versnum -on the specified +on the specified .Ar host . Entries are returned for all transports in the same protocol family as that used to contact the remote @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ options instead of the port number given by Use of this option avoids a call to the remote .Nm rpcbind to find out the address of the service. -This option is made +This option is made obsolete by the .Fl a option. @@ -269,7 +269,7 @@ on the specified .Ar host using UDP, and report whether a response was received. -This option is made +This option is made obsolete by the .Fl T option as shown in the third synopsis. @@ -280,7 +280,7 @@ To show all of the RPC services registered on the local machine use: .Dl "example% rpcinfo" .Pp To show all of the RPC -services registered with +services registered with .Nm rpcbind on the machine named .Dq klaxon @@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ use: .Dl "example% rpcinfo klaxon" .Pp The information displayed by the above commands can be quite lengthy. -Use the +Use the .Fl s option to display a more concise list: .Pp @@ -305,12 +305,12 @@ option to display a more concise list: .El .Pp To show whether the RPC -service with program number +service with program number .Ar prognum and version .Ar versnum is -registered on the machine named +registered on the machine named .Dq klaxon for the transport TCP use: @@ -324,7 +324,7 @@ protocol on the local machine use: .Pp .Dl "example% rpcinfo -p" .Pp -To delete the registration for version +To delete the registration for version 1 of the .Nm walld (program number 100008) diff --git a/usr.bin/rs/rs.1 b/usr.bin/rs/rs.1 index 6858e7f..dd4a3c3 100644 --- a/usr.bin/rs/rs.1 +++ b/usr.bin/rs/rs.1 @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ To convert stream input into vector output and back again, use A 10 by 10 array of random numbers from 1 to 100 and its transpose can be generated with .Bd -literal -offset indent -% jot \-r 100 | rs 10 10 | tee array | rs \-T > tarray +% jot \-r 100 | rs 10 10 | tee array | rs \-T > tarray .Ed .Pp In the editor diff --git a/usr.bin/rup/rup.1 b/usr.bin/rup/rup.1 index 1594adf..0241076 100644 --- a/usr.bin/rup/rup.1 +++ b/usr.bin/rup/rup.1 @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ .Dt RUP 1 .Os .Sh NAME -.Nm rup +.Nm rup .Nd remote status display .Sh SYNOPSIS .Nm @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ .Sh DESCRIPTION .Nm Rup displays a summary of the current system status of a particular -.Ar host +.Ar host or all hosts on the local network. The output shows the current time of day, how long the system has been up, diff --git a/usr.bin/ruptime/ruptime.1 b/usr.bin/ruptime/ruptime.1 index f34b58d..533f09c 100644 --- a/usr.bin/ruptime/ruptime.1 +++ b/usr.bin/ruptime/ruptime.1 @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ for each machine on the local network; these are formed from packets broadcast by each host on the network once every three minutes. .Pp Machines for which no status report has been received for 11 -minutes are shown as being down, and machines for which no status +minutes are shown as being down, and machines for which no status report has been received for 4 days are not shown in the list at all. .Pp The options are as follows: diff --git a/usr.bin/script/script.1 b/usr.bin/script/script.1 index 61d4f50..506da27 100644 --- a/usr.bin/script/script.1 +++ b/usr.bin/script/script.1 @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ .Nm Script makes a typescript of everything printed on your terminal. It is useful for students who need a hardcopy record of an interactive -session as proof of an assignment, as the typescript file +session as proof of an assignment, as the typescript file can be printed out later with .Xr lpr 1 . .Pp @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ If the argument .Ar command ... is given, .Nm -will run the specified command with an optional argument vector +will run the specified command with an optional argument vector instead of an interactive shell. .Pp Options: @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ to exit the Bourne shell .Pf ( Xr sh 1 ) , and -.Em exit , +.Em exit , .Em logout or .Em control-d diff --git a/usr.bin/split/split.1 b/usr.bin/split/split.1 index 631e624..a4119a9 100644 --- a/usr.bin/split/split.1 +++ b/usr.bin/split/split.1 @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ of the input file which is to be split. If a second additional argument is specified, it is used as a prefix for the names of the files into which the file is split. In this case, each file into which the file is split is named by the -prefix followed by a lexically ordered suffix in the range of +prefix followed by a lexically ordered suffix in the range of .Dq Li aa-zz . .Pp If the diff --git a/usr.bin/strings/strings.1 b/usr.bin/strings/strings.1 index 1e25258..3b820ba 100644 --- a/usr.bin/strings/strings.1 +++ b/usr.bin/strings/strings.1 @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Historic implementations of .Nm only search the initialized data portion of the object file. This was reasonable as strings were normally stored there. -Given new compiler technology which installs strings in the +Given new compiler technology which installs strings in the text portion of the object file, the default behavior was changed. .Sh HISTORY diff --git a/usr.bin/su/su.1 b/usr.bin/su/su.1 index f6f0e5a..cb9db05 100644 --- a/usr.bin/su/su.1 +++ b/usr.bin/su/su.1 @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ .Nm .Op Fl .Op Fl flm -.Op Fl c Ar class +.Op Fl c Ar class .Op Ar login Op Ar args .Sh DESCRIPTION .Nm Su @@ -189,16 +189,16 @@ as user You will be asked for man's password unless your real UID is 0. .It Li "su man -c 'catman /usr/share/man /usr/local/man /usr/X11R6/man'" Same as above, but the target command constitutes of more than a -single word and hence is quoted for use with the +single word and hence is quoted for use with the .Fl c option being passed to the shell. (Most shells expect the argument to .Fl c to be a single word). .It Li "su -c staff man -c 'catman /usr/share/man /usr/local/man /usr/X11R6/man'" -Same as above, but the target command is run with the resource limits of -the login class +Same as above, but the target command is run with the resource limits of +the login class .Dq staff . -Note: in this example, the first +Note: in this example, the first .Fl c option applies to .Nm diff --git a/usr.bin/symorder/symorder.1 b/usr.bin/symorder/symorder.1 index da93828..ed54ece 100644 --- a/usr.bin/symorder/symorder.1 +++ b/usr.bin/symorder/symorder.1 @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ are relocated to the beginning of the table and in the order given. .Bl -tag -width flag .It Fl c Makes all any symbols not in -.Ar symlist +.Ar symlist local to this file. .It Fl t Restrict the symbol table to the symbols listed in diff --git a/usr.bin/systat/systat.1 b/usr.bin/systat/systat.1 index 6908961..bc21be9 100644 --- a/usr.bin/systat/systat.1 +++ b/usr.bin/systat/systat.1 @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ virtual memory statistics (a la .Xr vmstat 8 ) , network ``mbuf'' utilization, .Tn TCP/IP -statistics, +statistics, and network connections (a la .Xr netstat 1 ) . .Pp @@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ display; the minimum unambiguous prefix may be supplied. .Bl -tag -width Fl -compact .It Cm numbers Show the disk -.Tn I/O +.Tn I/O statistics in numeric form. Values are displayed in numeric columns which scroll downward. .It Cm bars @@ -244,11 +244,11 @@ Toggle the display of kilobytes per transaction. not display kilobytes per transaction). .El .It Ic swap -Show information about swap space usage on all the +Show information about swap space usage on all the swap areas compiled into the kernel. The first column is the device name of the partition. The next column is the total space available in the partition. -The +The .Ar Used column indicates the total blocks used so far; the graph shows the percentage of space in use on each partition. @@ -307,14 +307,14 @@ handled by the per process name translation cache. .Pp At the bottom left is the disk usage display. It reports the number of -kilobytes per transaction, transactions per second, megabytes +kilobytes per transaction, transactions per second, megabytes per second and the percentage of the time the disk was busy averaged over the refresh period of the display (by default, five seconds). The system keeps statistics on most every storage device. In general, up to seven devices are displayed. The devices displayed by default are the -first devices in the kernel's device list. See +first devices in the kernel's device list. See .Xr devstat 3 -and +and .Xr devstat 9 for details on the devstat system. .Pp @@ -483,7 +483,7 @@ then the pipe separated matching expressions are ORed together. Any device matching the combined expression will be displayed, if there is room to display it. For example: .Pp -.Dl match da,scsi | cd,ide +.Dl match da,scsi | cd,ide .Pp This will display all SCSI Direct Access devices and all IDE CDROM devices. .Pp diff --git a/usr.bin/tconv/tconv.1 b/usr.bin/tconv/tconv.1 index 977889a..d749559 100644 --- a/usr.bin/tconv/tconv.1 +++ b/usr.bin/tconv/tconv.1 @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ that the library uses. It performs the same functions of .Xr captoinfo 1 -and +and .Xr tic 1 of System V. It also can be used to generate a terminfo source listing from a terminfo @@ -79,24 +79,24 @@ environment variable, and in otherwise .Nm will look in all available databases. -If neither +If neither .Fl I or .Fl B are given the .Fl I option will be assumed. -If the +If the .Fl B option is used, the compiled output will be put in the terminfo database, otherwise standard output is used. .Pp You cannot translate from terminfo binary to terminfo binary. -Translating from terminfo source to terminfo source is possible, -but not of much use in most cases, as +Translating from terminfo source to terminfo source is possible, +but not of much use in most cases, as .Em use= fields will be followed and incorporated into the output terminal -description. +description. .Pp .Nm Tconv should be able translate all standard termcap parameterized strings @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ The default filename of the termcap database. .Xr terminfo 5 .Sh DIAGNOSTICS The line number of a warning message when translating a file -may refer to the last line of an entry instead of the line in the entry +may refer to the last line of an entry instead of the line in the entry that generated the warning. .Sh BUGS More warning messages could be generated. diff --git a/usr.bin/telnet/telnet.1 b/usr.bin/telnet/telnet.1 index 0447467..7300986 100644 --- a/usr.bin/telnet/telnet.1 +++ b/usr.bin/telnet/telnet.1 @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ .Os .Sh NAME .Nm telnet -.Nd user interface to the +.Nd user interface to the .Tn TELNET protocol .Sh SYNOPSIS @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ protocol The .Nm command -is used to communicate with another host using the +is used to communicate with another host using the .Tn TELNET protocol. If @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ or, on systems that support it, a symbolic TOS name found in the .Pa /etc/iptos file. -.It Fl X Ar atype +.It Fl X Ar atype Disables the .Ar atype type of authentication. @@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ Sets the initial value of the .Ic debug toggle to .Dv TRUE . -.It Fl e Ar escapechar +.It Fl e Ar escapechar Sets the initial .Nm escape character to @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ realm .Ar realm instead of the remote host's realm, as determined by .Xr krb_realmofhost 3 . -.It Fl l Ar user +.It Fl l Ar user When connecting to the remote system, if the remote system understands the .Ev ENVIRON @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ option. This option may also be used with the .Ic open command. -.It Fl n Ar tracefile +.It Fl n Ar tracefile Opens .Ar tracefile for recording trace information. @@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ either \*(Lqcharacter at a time\*(Rq or \*(Lqold line by line\*(Rq depending on what the remote system supports. .Pp -When +When .Dv LINEMODE is enabled, character processing is done on the local system, under the control of the remote system. When input @@ -269,7 +269,7 @@ to turn off and on the local echo (this would mostly be used to enter passwords without the password being echoed). .Pp -If the +If the .Dv LINEMODE option is enabled, or if the .Ic localchars @@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ and characters are trapped locally, and sent as .Tn TELNET protocol sequences to the remote side. -If +If .Dv LINEMODE has ever been enabled, then the user's .Ic susp @@ -295,9 +295,9 @@ are also sent as protocol sequences, and .Ic quit -is sent as a +is sent as a .Dv TELNET ABORT -instead of +instead of .Dv BREAK . There are options (see .Ic toggle @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ and commands). .Pp .Bl -tag -width "mode type" -.It Ic auth Ar argument ... +.It Ic auth Ar argument ... The auth command manipulates the information sent through the .Dv TELNET AUTHENTICATE option. Valid arguments for the @@ -363,7 +363,7 @@ authentication. Close a .Tn TELNET session and return to command mode. -.It Ic display Ar argument ... +.It Ic display Ar argument ... Displays all, or some, of the .Ic set and @@ -462,7 +462,7 @@ Valid arguments for the .Ic environ command are: .Bl -tag -width Fl -.It Ic define Ar variable value +.It Ic define Ar variable value Define the variable .Ar variable to have a value of @@ -472,15 +472,15 @@ The .Ar value may be enclosed in single or double quotes so that tabs and spaces may be included. -.It Ic undefine Ar variable +.It Ic undefine Ar variable Remove .Ar variable from the list of environment variables. -.It Ic export Ar variable +.It Ic export Ar variable Mark the variable .Ar variable to be exported to the remote side. -.It Ic unexport Ar variable +.It Ic unexport Ar variable Mark the variable .Ar variable to not be exported unless @@ -514,7 +514,7 @@ If the remote side also supports the concept of suspending a user's session for later reattachment, the logout argument indicates that you should terminate the session immediately. -.It Ic mode Ar type +.It Ic mode Ar type .Ar Type is one of several options, depending on the state of the .Tn TELNET @@ -535,40 +535,40 @@ Enable the option, or, if the remote side does not understand the .Dv LINEMODE option, then attempt to enter \*(Lqold-line-by-line\*(Rq mode. -.It Ic isig Pq Ic \-isig -Attempt to enable (disable) the +.It Ic isig Pq Ic \-isig +Attempt to enable (disable) the .Dv TRAPSIG -mode of the +mode of the .Dv LINEMODE option. -This requires that the +This requires that the .Dv LINEMODE option be enabled. -.It Ic edit Pq Ic \-edit -Attempt to enable (disable) the +.It Ic edit Pq Ic \-edit +Attempt to enable (disable) the .Dv EDIT -mode of the +mode of the .Dv LINEMODE option. -This requires that the +This requires that the .Dv LINEMODE option be enabled. -.It Ic softtabs Pq Ic \-softtabs -Attempt to enable (disable) the +.It Ic softtabs Pq Ic \-softtabs +Attempt to enable (disable) the .Dv SOFT_TAB -mode of the +mode of the .Dv LINEMODE option. -This requires that the +This requires that the .Dv LINEMODE option be enabled. -.It Ic litecho Pq Ic \-litecho -Attempt to enable (disable) the +.It Ic litecho Pq Ic \-litecho +Attempt to enable (disable) the .Dv LIT_ECHO -mode of the +mode of the .Dv LINEMODE option. -This requires that the +This requires that the .Dv LINEMODE option be enabled. .It Ic ?\& @@ -625,7 +625,7 @@ Close any open session and exit .Nm . An end of file (in command mode) will also close a session and exit. -.It Ic send Ar arguments +.It Ic send Ar arguments Sends one or more special character sequences to the remote host. The following are the arguments which may be specified (more than one argument may be specified at a time): @@ -747,8 +747,8 @@ Prints out help information for the .Ic send command. .El -.It Ic set Ar argument value -.It Ic unset Ar argument value +.It Ic set Ar argument value +.It Ic unset Ar argument value The .Ic set command will set any one of a number of @@ -1052,20 +1052,20 @@ Displays the legal .Pq Ic unset commands. .El -.It Ic skey Ar sequence challenge +.It Ic skey Ar sequence challenge The .Ic skey command computes a response to the S/Key challenge. -.It Ic slc Ar state +.It Ic slc Ar state The .Ic slc command (Set Local Characters) is used to set or change the state of the special -characters when the +characters when the .Dv TELNET LINEMODE option has been enabled. Special characters are characters that get -mapped to +mapped to .Tn TELNET commands sequences (like .Ic ip @@ -1091,7 +1091,7 @@ was started. .It Ic import Switch to the remote defaults for the special characters. The remote default characters are those of the remote system -at the time when the +at the time when the .Tn TELNET connection was established. .It Ic ?\& @@ -1104,7 +1104,7 @@ Show the current status of .Nm . This includes the peer one is connected to, as well as the current mode. -.It Ic toggle Ar arguments ... +.It Ic toggle Ar arguments ... Toggle (between .Dv TRUE and @@ -1373,17 +1373,17 @@ Suspend .Nm . This command only works when the user is using the .Xr csh 1 . -.It Ic \&! Op Ar command +.It Ic \&! Op Ar command Execute a single command in a subshell on the local system. If .Ar command is omitted, then an interactive subshell is invoked. -.It Ic ?\& Op Ar command +.It Ic ?\& Op Ar command Get help. With no arguments, .Nm prints a help summary. -If +If .Ar command is specified, .Nm @@ -1424,7 +1424,7 @@ IPv6 support was added by WIDE/KAME project. On some remote systems, echo has to be turned off manually when in \*(Lqold line by line\*(Rq mode. .Pp -In \*(Lqold line by line\*(Rq mode or +In \*(Lqold line by line\*(Rq mode or .Dv LINEMODE the terminal's .Ic eof diff --git a/usr.bin/tftp/tftp.1 b/usr.bin/tftp/tftp.1 index dbcc206..a09cf37 100644 --- a/usr.bin/tftp/tftp.1 +++ b/usr.bin/tftp/tftp.1 @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ does not maintain connections between transfers; thus, the .Cm connect command does not actually create a connection, but merely remembers what host is to be used for transfers. -You do not have to use the +You do not have to use the .Cm connect command; the remote host can be specified as part of the .Cm get @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ If the latter form is used, the last hostname specified becomes the default for future transfers. .Pp .It Cm mode Ar transfer-mode -Set the mode for transfers; +Set the mode for transfers; .Ar transfer-mode may be one of .Em ascii diff --git a/usr.bin/time/time.1 b/usr.bin/time/time.1 index ce21239..e96aeed 100644 --- a/usr.bin/time/time.1 +++ b/usr.bin/time/time.1 @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ After the finishes, .Nm writes to the standard error stream, -(in seconds): +(in seconds): the total time elapsed, the time used to execute the .Ar command @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ The contents of the .Em rusage structure are printed as well. .It Fl o Ar file -Write the output to +Write the output to .Ar file instead of stderr. If .Ar file @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Some shells may provide a builtin command which is similar or identical to this utility. Consult the .Xr builtin 1 -manual page. +manual page. .Sh DIAGNOSTICS If .Ar command @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ could be timed successfully, its exit status is returned. If .Ar command terminated abnormally, a warning message is output to stderr. -If the +If the .Ar command was found but could not be run, the exit status is 126. If no diff --git a/usr.bin/tip/tip/modems.5 b/usr.bin/tip/tip/modems.5 index 7f2788e..1675e20 100644 --- a/usr.bin/tip/tip/modems.5 +++ b/usr.bin/tip/tip/modems.5 @@ -62,23 +62,23 @@ When .Xr tip 1 is invoked, an entry for a remote system is looked up in the .Pa /etc/remote -database. -If the entry includes an "ACU" type capability (abbreviated at), +database. +If the entry includes an "ACU" type capability (abbreviated at), .Xr tip 1 -looks up the specified modem in +looks up the specified modem in .Pa /etc/modems . If a modem entry is found, -the corresponding capabilities determine how +the corresponding capabilities determine how .Xr tip 1 programs the modem when connecting to and disconnecting from the remote system. .Sh CAPABILITIES Capabilities are either strings (str), numbers (num), or boolean -flags (bool). A string capability is specified by +flags (bool). A string capability is specified by .Em capability Ns Ar = Ns Em value ; for example, ``reset_command=ATZ\\r''. A numeric capability is specified by .Em capability Ns Ar # Ns Em value ; -for example, ``intercharacter_delay#50''. A boolean capability is specified +for example, ``intercharacter_delay#50''. A boolean capability is specified by simply listing the capability. .Bl -tag -width intercharacter_delay .It Cm \&dial_command @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ issued to the modem. .It Cm \&lock_baud (bool) Use a fixed bit rate between the computer and the modem (DTE / DCE). The -bit rate is specified in +bit rate is specified in .Pa /etc/remote . .It Cm \&reset_command (str) diff --git a/usr.bin/tip/tip/tip.1 b/usr.bin/tip/tip/tip.1 index a737e43..1be2bef 100644 --- a/usr.bin/tip/tip/tip.1 +++ b/usr.bin/tip/tip/tip.1 @@ -41,11 +41,11 @@ .Sh SYNOPSIS .Nm .Op Fl v -.Fl Ns Ns Ar speed +.Fl Ns Ns Ar speed .Ar system\-name .Nm .Op Fl v -.Fl Ns Ns Ar speed +.Fl Ns Ns Ar speed .Ar phone\-number .Sh DESCRIPTION The @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ are recognized: Drop the connection and exit (you may still be logged in on the remote machine). -.It Ic \&~c Op Ar name +.It Ic \&~c Op Ar name Change directory to .Ar name (no argument @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Copy file from remote to local. .Nm Tip prompts first for the name of the file to be sent, then for a command to be executed on the remote machine. -.It Ic \&~p Ar from Op Ar to +.It Ic \&~p Ar from Op Ar to Send a file to a remote .Ux host. The put command causes the remote @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ file. If the ``to'' file isn't specified the ``from'' file name is used. This command is actually a .Ux specific version of the ``~>'' command. -.It Ic \&~t Ar from Op Ar to +.It Ic \&~t Ar from Op Ar to Take a file from a remote .Ux host. @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ When must dial a phone number to connect to a system it will print various messages indicating its actions. .Nm Tip -supports modems that use the AT command set. +supports modems that use the AT command set. .Nm Tip uses the file .Pa /etc/modems diff --git a/usr.bin/tput/tput.1 b/usr.bin/tput/tput.1 index 6d7933f..c4c1d1b 100644 --- a/usr.bin/tput/tput.1 +++ b/usr.bin/tput/tput.1 @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ applications. When invoked as the utility, the screen will be cleared as if .Dl tput clear had been executed. -The options to +The options to .Nm are as follows: .Bl -tag -width Ds diff --git a/usr.bin/tr/tr.1 b/usr.bin/tr/tr.1 index b3c30f4..9adc132 100644 --- a/usr.bin/tr/tr.1 +++ b/usr.bin/tr/tr.1 @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ the same equivalence class as If there is a secondary ordering within the equivalence class, the characters are ordered in ascending sequence. -Otherwise, they are ordered after their encoded values. +Otherwise, they are ordered after their encoded values. An example of an equivalence class might be ``c'' and ``ch'' in Spanish; English has no equivalence classes. .It [#*n] @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ the range is intended to map in another range, i.e. the command to the ``['' character in .Ar string2 . However, if the shell script is deleting or squeezing characters as in -the command ``tr -d [a-z]'', the characters ``['' and ``]'' will be +the command ``tr -d [a-z]'', the characters ``['' and ``]'' will be included in the deletion or compression list which would not have happened under an historic System V implementation. Additionally, any scripts that depended on the sequence ``a-z'' to diff --git a/usr.bin/true/true.1 b/usr.bin/true/true.1 index 5480478..23d10f3 100644 --- a/usr.bin/true/true.1 +++ b/usr.bin/true/true.1 @@ -47,8 +47,8 @@ The .Nm command is normally used in a Bourne shell script. -It tests for the appropriate status "false" before running -(or failing to run) a list of commands. +It tests for the appropriate status "false" before running +(or failing to run) a list of commands. .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr csh 1 , .Xr false 1 , diff --git a/usr.bin/truncate/truncate.1 b/usr.bin/truncate/truncate.1 index 3790b20..9f4747a 100644 --- a/usr.bin/truncate/truncate.1 +++ b/usr.bin/truncate/truncate.1 @@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ .Dt TRUNCATE 1 .Os .Sh NAME -.Nm truncate +.Nm truncate .Nd truncate or extend the length of files .Sh SYNOPSIS .Nm @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ .Ar .Sh DESCRIPTION The -.Nm +.Nm utility adjusts the length of each regular file given on the command-line. .Pp The following options are available: diff --git a/usr.bin/truss/truss.1 b/usr.bin/truss/truss.1 index d38b361..a0ef8dd 100644 --- a/usr.bin/truss/truss.1 +++ b/usr.bin/truss/truss.1 @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ Print the output to the specified .Ar file instead of standard error. .It Fl p Ar pid -Follow the process specified by +Follow the process specified by .Ar pid instead of a new command. .It Ar command Op args diff --git a/usr.bin/tsort/tsort.1 b/usr.bin/tsort/tsort.1 index 6be1978..724c151 100644 --- a/usr.bin/tsort/tsort.1 +++ b/usr.bin/tsort/tsort.1 @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ The options are as follows: .Bl -tag -width Ds .It Fl d Turn on debugging. -.It Fl l +.It Fl l Search for and display the longest cycle. Can take a very long time. .It Fl q diff --git a/usr.bin/uac/uac.1 b/usr.bin/uac/uac.1 index 5ee5c10..0246a66 100644 --- a/usr.bin/uac/uac.1 +++ b/usr.bin/uac/uac.1 @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ rather than send the faulting process a signal. However, doing so does slow down the execution of the faulting process. -At bootup, the DEC Alpha CPU defaults to printing +At bootup, the DEC Alpha CPU defaults to printing .Bd -ragged .Em pid .Ar nnn Pq Ar <progname> : diff --git a/usr.bin/ul/ul.1 b/usr.bin/ul/ul.1 index bb76ea0..256930b 100644 --- a/usr.bin/ul/ul.1 +++ b/usr.bin/ul/ul.1 @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ specified in or as set during the login process by the user in their .Pa login file (see -.Xr environ 7 ) . +.Xr environ 7 ) . .El .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr colcrt 1 , diff --git a/usr.bin/units/units.1 b/usr.bin/units/units.1 index a213367..24fd08d 100644 --- a/usr.bin/units/units.1 +++ b/usr.bin/units/units.1 @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ result of the single specified conversion. .Sh DESCRIPTION The .Nm -program converts quantities expressed in various scales to +program converts quantities expressed in various scales to their equivalents in other scales. The .Nm program can only @@ -60,8 +60,8 @@ the user for input: Powers of units can be specified using the '^' character as shown in the example, or by simple concatenation: 'cm3' is equivalent to 'cm^3'. Multiplication of units can be specified by using spaces, a dash or -an asterisk. Division of units is indicated by the slash ('/'). -Note that multiplication has a higher precedence than division, +an asterisk. Division of units is indicated by the slash ('/'). +Note that multiplication has a higher precedence than division, so 'm/s/s' is the same as 'm/s^2' or 'm/s s'. Division of numbers must be indicated using the vertical bar ('|'). To convert half a meter, you would write '1|2 meter'. If you write '1/2 meter' then the @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ print a message indicating that the units are not conformable and it will display the reduced form for each unit: .Bd -literal You have: ergs/hour - You want: fathoms kg^2 / day + You want: fathoms kg^2 / day conformability error 2.7777778e-11 kg m^2 / sec^3 2.1166667e-05 kg^2 m / sec @@ -104,26 +104,26 @@ name, then will try to remove a trailing 's' or a trailing 'es' and check again for a match. .Pp -To find out what units are available read the standard units file. -If you want to add your own units you can supply your own file. +To find out what units are available read the standard units file. +If you want to add your own units you can supply your own file. A unit is specified on a single line by giving its name and an equivalence. Be careful to define new units in terms of old ones so that a reduction leads to the -primitive units which are marked with '!' characters. +primitive units which are marked with '!' characters. The .Nm program will not detect infinite loops that could be caused by careless unit definitions. Comments in the unit definition file -begin with a '/' character at the beginning of a line. +begin with a '/' character at the beginning of a line. .Pp -Prefixes are defined in the same was as standard units, but with +Prefixes are defined in the same was as standard units, but with a trailing dash at the end of the prefix name. If a unit is not found even after removing trailing 's' or 'es', then it will be checked against the list of prefixes. Prefixes will be removed until a legal -base unit is identified. +base unit is identified. .Pp Here is an example of a short units file that defines some basic -units. +units. .Pp .Bl -inset -offset indent -compact .It "m !a! @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ of the units converted and on the length of the data file. .Pp The program should use a hash table to store units so that it doesn't take so long to load the units list and check -for duplication. +for duplication. .Sh FILES .Bl -tag -width /usr/share/misc/units.lib -compact .It Pa /usr/share/misc/units.lib diff --git a/usr.bin/uuencode/uuencode.1 b/usr.bin/uuencode/uuencode.1 index 4721202..4a2454d 100644 --- a/usr.bin/uuencode/uuencode.1 +++ b/usr.bin/uuencode/uuencode.1 @@ -83,8 +83,8 @@ The following options are available for .Nm uudecode : .Bl -tag -width ident .It Fl c -Decode more than one uuencode'd file from -.Ar file +Decode more than one uuencode'd file from +.Ar file if possible. .It Fl i Do not overwrite files. @@ -94,8 +94,8 @@ Decode and write output to standard output. .It Fl s Do not strip output pathname to base filename. -By default -.Nm uudecode +By default +.Nm uudecode deletes any prefix ending with the last slash '/' for security purpose. .El @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ tar cf \- src_tree \&| compress \&| uuencode src_tree.tar.Z \&| mail sys1!sys2!user .Ed .Pp -The following example unpack all uuencode'd +The following example unpack all uuencode'd files from your mailbox into your current working directory. .Pp .Bd -literal -offset indent -compact diff --git a/usr.bin/uuencode/uuencode.format.5 b/usr.bin/uuencode/uuencode.format.5 index e83b695..4c5f73f 100644 --- a/usr.bin/uuencode/uuencode.format.5 +++ b/usr.bin/uuencode/uuencode.format.5 @@ -76,9 +76,9 @@ from the character. Character 64 represents a count of zero. .Pp Groups of 3 bytes are stored in 4 characters, 6 bits per character. -All characters are always in range from 1 to 64 and are offset by a +All characters are always in range from 1 to 64 and are offset by a space (octal 40) to make the characters printing. -Character +Character 64 represents a count of zero. The last line may be shorter than the normal 45 bytes. If the size is not a multiple of 3, this fact can be determined diff --git a/usr.bin/vgrind/vgrind.1 b/usr.bin/vgrind/vgrind.1 index d16a69f..ef4e31f 100644 --- a/usr.bin/vgrind/vgrind.1 +++ b/usr.bin/vgrind/vgrind.1 @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ .Nd grind nice listings of programs .Sh SYNOPSIS .Nm -.Op Fl +.Op Fl .Op Fl W .Op Fl d Ar file .Op Fl f @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ .Ar name Ar ... .Sh DESCRIPTION .Nm Vgrind -formats the program sources which are arguments +formats the program sources which are arguments in a nice style using .Xr troff 1 Comments are placed in italics, keywords in bold face, @@ -64,12 +64,12 @@ page as it is encountered. .Nm Vgrind runs in two basic modes, filter mode (see the .Fl f -option) or regular mode. In filter mode +option) or regular mode. In filter mode .Nm acts as a filter in a manner similar to .Xr tbl 1 . The standard input is passed directly to the standard output except -for lines bracketed by the +for lines bracketed by the .Em troff-like macros: .Bl -tag -width Ds @@ -80,27 +80,27 @@ ends processing .El .Pp These lines are formatted as described above. The output from this -filter can be passed to +filter can be passed to .Xr troff -for output. There need be no particular ordering with +for output. There need be no particular ordering with .Xr eqn 1 or .Xr tbl 1 . .Pp -In regular mode +In regular mode .Nm accepts input files, processes them, and passes them to the postprocessor for output, .Xr psroff 1 -by default. +by default. .Pp -In both modes +In both modes .Nm passes any lines beginning with a decimal point without conversion. .Pp The options are: .Bl -tag -width Ar -.It Fl +.It Fl forces input to be taken from standard input (default if .Fl f is specified ) @@ -160,14 +160,14 @@ similar to the same option in .Xr troff causing formatted text to go to the standard output .It Fl x -outputs the index file in a ``pretty'' format. -The index file itself is produced whenever +outputs the index file in a ``pretty'' format. +The index file itself is produced whenever .Nm -is run with a file called +is run with a file called .Pa index in the current directory. The index of function -definitions can then be run off by giving +definitions can then be run off by giving .Nm the .Fl x @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ language descriptions .Sh BUGS Vfontedpr assumes that a certain programming style is followed: .Pp -For +For .Tn C \- function names can be preceded on a line only by spaces, tabs, or an asterisk. The parenthesized arguments must also be on the same line. diff --git a/usr.bin/vgrind/vgrindefs.5 b/usr.bin/vgrind/vgrindefs.5 index 4b7ca10..5ecbd7f 100644 --- a/usr.bin/vgrind/vgrindefs.5 +++ b/usr.bin/vgrind/vgrindefs.5 @@ -48,10 +48,10 @@ file contains all language definitions for .Xr vgrind 1 . The data base is -very similar to +very similar to .Xr termcap 5 . .Sh FIELDS -The following table names and describes each field. +The following table names and describes each field. .Pp .Bl -column Namexxx Tpexxx .It Sy "Name Type Description @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ while the string .Ql $# is an operator on an array. .Sh EXAMPLES -The following entry, which describes the C language, is +The following entry, which describes the C language, is typical of a language entry. .Bd -literal C|c:\ @@ -107,11 +107,11 @@ are of two types: Boolean capabilities which indicate that the language has some particular feature and string -capabilities which give a regular expression or +capabilities which give a regular expression or keyword list. .Sh REGULAR EXPRESSIONS .Nm Vgrindefs -uses regular expression which are very similar to those of +uses regular expression which are very similar to those of .Xr ex 1 and .Xr lex 1 . @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ would match "tramp", "steamer", "trampflies", or "steamerflies". .Sh KEYWORD LIST The keyword list is just a list of keywords in the language separated by spaces. If the "oc" boolean is specified, indicating that upper -and lower case are equivalent, then all the keywords should be +and lower case are equivalent, then all the keywords should be specified in lower case. .Sh FILES .Bl -tag -width /usr/share/misc/vgrindefs -compact diff --git a/usr.bin/vmstat/vmstat.8 b/usr.bin/vmstat/vmstat.8 index 1ce1607..ff8b80b 100644 --- a/usr.bin/vmstat/vmstat.8 +++ b/usr.bin/vmstat/vmstat.8 @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ The first display is for the time since a reboot and each subsequent report is for the time period since the last display. If no repeat .Ar count -is specified, and +is specified, and .Fl w is specified, the default is infinity, otherwise the default is one. .\" .It Fl f @@ -84,12 +84,12 @@ Report on the number of interrupts taken by each device since system startup. .It Fl M Extract values associated with the name list from the specified -.Ar core -instead of the default +.Ar core +instead of the default .Pa /dev/kmem . .It Fl N -Extract the name list from the specified -.Ar system +Extract the name list from the specified +.Ar system instead of the default .Pa /kernel . .It Fl m @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ categories of devices: .Bl -tag -width indent -compact .It device type: .Bl -tag -width 9n -compact -.It da +.It da Direct Access devices .It sa Sequential Access devices @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ Passthrough devices .Pp The user must specify at least one device type, and may specify at most one device type from each category. Multiple device types in a single -device type statement must be separated by commas. +device type statement must be separated by commas. .Pp Any number of .Fl p @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ arguments are ORed together to form a matching expression against which all devices in the system are compared. Any device that fully matches any .Fl p -argument will be included in the +argument will be included in the .Nm output, up to three devices, or the maximum number of devices specified by the user. @@ -316,7 +316,7 @@ default memory file The sections starting with ``Interpreting system activity'' in .%T "Installing and Operating 4.3BSD" . .Sh BUGS -The +The .Fl c and .Fl w diff --git a/usr.bin/w/uptime.1 b/usr.bin/w/uptime.1 index e9bca5c..c5d0c34 100644 --- a/usr.bin/w/uptime.1 +++ b/usr.bin/w/uptime.1 @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ .Sh SYNOPSIS .Nm .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm utility displays the current time, the length of time the system has been up, diff --git a/usr.bin/w/w.1 b/usr.bin/w/w.1 index 147a5c3..5d9d182 100644 --- a/usr.bin/w/w.1 +++ b/usr.bin/w/w.1 @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ Sometimes processes, typically those in the background, are printed with null or garbaged arguments. In these cases, the name of the command is printed in parentheses. .Pp -The +The .Nm utility does not know about the new conventions for detection of background jobs. diff --git a/usr.bin/which/which.1 b/usr.bin/which/which.1 index 2a7f5de..fd97d13 100644 --- a/usr.bin/which/which.1 +++ b/usr.bin/which/which.1 @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ Some shells may provide a builtin command which is similar or identical to this utility. Consult the .Xr builtin 1 -manual page. +manual page. .Sh HISTORY The .Nm diff --git a/usr.bin/who/who.1 b/usr.bin/who/who.1 index c4d81fc..5abded5 100644 --- a/usr.bin/who/who.1 +++ b/usr.bin/who/who.1 @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ .Nm .Ar am I .Nm -.Op Ar file +.Op Ar file .Sh DESCRIPTION The .Nm @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ Available options: .Pp .Bl -tag -width file .It Ar \&am I -Returns the invoker's real user name. +Returns the invoker's real user name. .It Ar file By default, .Nm diff --git a/usr.bin/window/window.1 b/usr.bin/window/window.1 index 95b7254..ade98e4 100644 --- a/usr.bin/window/window.1 +++ b/usr.bin/window/window.1 @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Ignore .Pa .windowrc and create the two default windows instead. -.It Fl e Ar escape-char +.It Fl e Ar escape-char Set the escape character to .Ar escape-char . .Ar Escape-char @@ -96,8 +96,8 @@ can be a single character, or in the form where .Ar X is any character, meaning -.No control\- Ns Ar X . -.It Fl c Ar command +.No control\- Ns Ar X . +.It Fl c Ar command Execute the string .Ar command as a long command (see below) @@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ represents one of the digits ``1'' to ``9'' corresponding to the windows 1 to 9. .Ic ^X means -.No control\- Ns Ar X , +.No control\- Ns Ar X , where .Ar X is any character. In particular, @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ Select window .Ar # as the current window and return to conversation mode. -.It Ic \&% Ns Ar # +.It Ic \&% Ns Ar # Select window .Ar # but stay in command mode. @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ is used (see command below). .Pp Only fully visible windows can be created this way. -.It Ic c Ns Ar # +.It Ic c Ns Ar # Close window .Ar # . The process in the window is sent @@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ the hangup signal (see .Xr Csh 1 should handle this signal correctly and cause no problems. -.It Ic m Ns Ar # +.It Ic m Ns Ar # Move window .Ar # to another location. A box in the shape @@ -282,11 +282,11 @@ those for the .Ic w command are used to position the box. The window can be moved partially off-screen. -.It Ic M Ns Ar # +.It Ic M Ns Ar # Move window .Ar # to its previous position. -.It Ic s Ns Ar # +.It Ic s Ns Ar # Change the size of window .Ar # . The user is prompted @@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ keys used in and .Ic m are used to enter the position. -.It Ic S Ns Ar # +.It Ic S Ns Ar # Change window .Ar # to its previous size. @@ -415,12 +415,12 @@ The operators in order of increasing precedence: .Aq Va expr2 .Xc Assignment. The variable of name -.Aq Va expr1 , +.Aq Va expr1 , which must be string valued, is assigned the result of -.Aq Va expr2 . +.Aq Va expr2 . Returns the value of -.Aq Va expr2 . +.Aq Va expr2 . .It Xo .Aq Va expr1 .Ic \&? @@ -429,19 +429,19 @@ Returns the value of .Aq Va expr3 .Xc Returns the value of -.Aq Va expr2 +.Aq Va expr2 if -.Aq Va expr1 +.Aq Va expr1 evaluates true (non-zero numeric value); returns the value of -.Aq Va expr3 +.Aq Va expr3 otherwise. Only one of -.Aq Va expr2 +.Aq Va expr2 and -.Aq Va expr3 +.Aq Va expr3 is evaluated. -.Aq Va Expr1 +.Aq Va Expr1 must be numeric. .It Xo @@ -451,9 +451,9 @@ be numeric. .Xc Logical or. Numeric values only. Short circuit evaluation is supported (i.e., if -.Aq Va expr1 +.Aq Va expr1 evaluates true, then -.Aq Va expr2 +.Aq Va expr2 is not evaluated). .It Xo .Aq Va expr1 @@ -641,7 +641,7 @@ listed. Otherwise, .Aq Ar string is defined as an alias, with expansion -.Aq Ar string\-list > . +.Aq Ar string\-list > . The previous definition of .Aq Ar string , if any, is returned. Default for @@ -736,7 +736,7 @@ meaning .No control\- Ns Ar X . .It Xo .Ic foreground Ns ( Bq Ar window , -.Bq Ar flag ) +.Bq Ar flag ) .Xc Move .Nm @@ -751,7 +751,7 @@ default for is no change. .It Xo .Ic label Ns ( Bq Ar window , -.Bq Ar label ) +.Bq Ar label ) .Xc Set the label of .Nm @@ -812,12 +812,12 @@ No arguments. List all variables. No value is returned. .Bq Ar ncol , .Bq Ar nline , .Bq Ar label , -.Bq Ar pty , +.Bq Ar pty , .Bq Ar frame , .Bq Ar mapnl , .Bq Ar keepopen , .Bq Ar smooth , -.Bq Ar shell ) . +.Bq Ar shell ) . .Xc Open a window with upper left corner at .Ar row , @@ -937,7 +937,7 @@ utilizes these environment variables: .Bl -tag -width /dev/[pt]ty[pq]? -compact .It Pa ~/.windowrc startup command file. -.It Pa /dev/[pt]ty[pq]? +.It Pa /dev/[pt]ty[pq]? pseudo-terminal devices. .El .Sh HISTORY diff --git a/usr.bin/xstr/xstr.1 b/usr.bin/xstr/xstr.1 index 9425035..2adbcc7 100644 --- a/usr.bin/xstr/xstr.1 +++ b/usr.bin/xstr/xstr.1 @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ .Sh SYNOPSIS .Nm .Op Fl c -.Op Fl +.Op Fl .Op Fl v .Op Ar file .Sh DESCRIPTION diff --git a/usr.bin/ypcat/ypcat.1 b/usr.bin/ypcat/ypcat.1 index 6c3e441..1a9e8cb 100644 --- a/usr.bin/ypcat/ypcat.1 +++ b/usr.bin/ypcat/ypcat.1 @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ .Fl x .Sh DESCRIPTION .Nm Ypcat -prints out the values of all keys from the +prints out the values of all keys from the .Tn YP database specified by .Ar mapname , diff --git a/usr.bin/ypmatch/ypmatch.1 b/usr.bin/ypmatch/ypmatch.1 index bd59eef..4559403 100644 --- a/usr.bin/ypmatch/ypmatch.1 +++ b/usr.bin/ypmatch/ypmatch.1 @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ .Fl x .Sh DESCRIPTION .Nm Ypmatch -prints out the values of one or more keys from the +prints out the values of one or more keys from the .Tn YP database specified by .Ar mapname , diff --git a/usr.sbin/IPXrouted/IPXrouted.8 b/usr.sbin/IPXrouted/IPXrouted.8 index 60a9d5b..fc1a1a1 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/IPXrouted/IPXrouted.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/IPXrouted/IPXrouted.8 @@ -63,16 +63,16 @@ Do not supply routing information (opposite of .Fl s option below). .It Fl s -Forces +Forces .Nm to supply routing information whether it is acting as an internetwork router or not. .It Fl S -Do not supply Service Advertizing Protocol +Do not supply Service Advertizing Protocol (SAP) information. -The default is to supply -SAP +The default is to supply +SAP information. .It Fl t All packets sent or received are @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ printed on the standard output. In addition, will not divorce itself from the controlling terminal so that interrupts from the keyboard will kill the process. .It Ar logfile -Name of file in which +Name of file in which .Nm Ns 's actions should be logged. This log contains information about any changes to the routing tables and a history of @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ is ignored). If multiple interfaces are present, it is assumed the host will forward packets between networks. .Nm -then transmits a +then transmits a .Em request packet on each interface (using a broadcast packet if the interface supports it) and enters a loop, listening @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ packets from other hosts. .Pp When a .Em request -packet is received, +packet is received, .Nm formulates a reply based on the information maintained in its internal tables. The diff --git a/usr.sbin/ac/ac.8 b/usr.sbin/ac/ac.8 index 40b656d..272c8eb 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/ac/ac.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/ac/ac.8 @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ .Op Fl w Ar wtmp .Op Ar users ... .Sh DESCRIPTION -If the file +If the file .Pa /var/log/wtmp exists, a record of individual login and logout times are written to it by @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ The options are as follows: .It Fl d Display the connect times in 24 hour chunks. .\" .It Fl c Ar console -.\" Use +.\" Use .\" .Ar console .\" as the name of the device that local X sessions (ut_host of ":0.0") .\" originate from. If any login has been recorded on @@ -138,10 +138,10 @@ rotated files .\" .Nm ac .\" ignores the fact that entries with ut_host of ":0.0" are not real .\" login sessions. Normally such entries are ignored except in the case -.\" of a user being logged in when the +.\" of a user being logged in when the .\" .Pa wtmp .\" file was rotated, in which case a login with ut_host of ":0.0" may -.\" appear without any preceding console logins. +.\" appear without any preceding console logins. .\" If no one is logged in on the console, the user is deemed to have .\" logged in on at the earliest time stamp found in .\" .Pa wtmp . diff --git a/usr.sbin/accton/accton.8 b/usr.sbin/accton/accton.8 index d457052..ab315eb 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/accton/accton.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/accton/accton.8 @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ .Sh DESCRIPTION The .Nm -command is used +command is used for switching system accounting on or off. If called with the argument .Ar acctfile , diff --git a/usr.sbin/acpi/acpiconf/acpiconf.8 b/usr.sbin/acpi/acpiconf/acpiconf.8 index 0ff94d6..92128c9 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/acpi/acpiconf/acpiconf.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/acpi/acpiconf/acpiconf.8 @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ and .Xr acpidump 8 , .Xr apm 8 .Sh HISTORY -The +The .Nm command appeared in .Fx 5.0 . diff --git a/usr.sbin/acpi/acpidump/acpidump.8 b/usr.sbin/acpi/acpidump/acpidump.8 index 85242d6..5c6ca9b 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/acpi/acpidump/acpidump.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/acpi/acpidump/acpidump.8 @@ -26,9 +26,9 @@ .\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY .\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF .\" SUCH DAMAGE. -.\" +.\" .\" $FreeBSD$ -.\" +.\" .Dd August 31, 2000 .Dt ACPIDUMP 8 .Os @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ OEM Revision, Creator ID and Creator Revision. .Nm dumps contents of these SDTs. For further information about formats of each table, -see chapter 5: ACPI Software Programming Model, +see chapter 5: ACPI Software Programming Model, .Dq Advanced Configuration and Power Interface Specification Revision 1.0b from Intel/Microsoft/Toshiba. .Pp @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ such as interrupt mode .Pq INT_MODEL , SCI interrupt number, SMI command port .Pq SMI_CMD -and location of ACPI registers. +and location of ACPI registers. FACP also has a pointer to a physical memory address for DSDT, which includes information used on the kernel side such as PnP, power management support and so on. @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ and then interprets the DSDT again referring to namespace. .Xr amldb 8 .Pp .Dq Advanced Configuration and Power Interfce Specification -.Bd -literal -offset indent -compact +.Bd -literal -offset indent -compact Intel Microsoft Toshiba diff --git a/usr.sbin/acpi/amldb/amldb.8 b/usr.sbin/acpi/amldb/amldb.8 index e98aeb0..a253a21 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/acpi/amldb/amldb.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/acpi/amldb/amldb.8 @@ -1,10 +1,10 @@ .\" ACPI (ACPI Package) -.\" +.\" .\" Copyright (c) 2000 Takanori Watanabe <takawata@FreeBSD.org> .\" Copyright (c) 2000 Mitsuru IWASAKI <iwasaki@FreeBSD.org> .\" Copyright (c) 2000 Yasuo YOKOYAMA <yokoyama@jp.FreeBSD.org> .\" Copyright (c) 2000 Norihiro KUMAGAI <kumagai@home.com> -.\" +.\" .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions .\" are met: @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ box; c | l. value region type = -0 SystemMemory +0 SystemMemory 1 SystemIO 2 PCI_Concig 3 EmbeddedControl @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ more arguments, a prompt such as the following appears; .Bd -literal Method: Arg 1 From 0x280626ce To 0x28062775 Enter argument values (ex. number 1 / string foo). 'q' to quit. - Arg0 ? + Arg0 ? .Ed .Pp For each argument, a pair of type string and value delimited by diff --git a/usr.sbin/adduser/adduser.8 b/usr.sbin/adduser/adduser.8 index b514de7..db09a91 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/adduser/adduser.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/adduser/adduser.8 @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ .Op Fl v | verbose .Ek .Sh DESCRIPTION -.Nm Adduser +.Nm Adduser is a simple program for adding new users. Adduser checks the passwd, group and shell databases. @@ -61,16 +61,16 @@ directory, dotfiles and sends the new user a welcome message. Login name. May contain only lowercase characters or digits. Maximum length -is 16 characters (see +is 16 characters (see .Xr setlogin 2 -BUGS section). -The reasons for this limit are "Historical". +BUGS section). +The reasons for this limit are "Historical". Given that people have traditionally wanted to break this limit for aesthetic reasons, it's never been of great importance to break such a basic fundamental parameter in UNIX. -You can change -.Dv UT_NAMESIZE -in +You can change +.Dv UT_NAMESIZE +in .Pa /usr/include/utmp.h and recompile the world; people have done this and it works, but you will have problems @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ If you need a longer login name for e-mail addresses, you can define an alias in .Pa /etc/mail/aliases . .It Sy fullname -Firstname and surname. +Firstname and surname. The .Ql Pa \&: character is not allowed. @@ -90,13 +90,13 @@ Only valid shells from the shell database or sliplogin and pppd .It Sy uid Automatically generated or your choice, must be less than 32000. .It Sy gid/login group -Your choice or automatically generated. +Your choice or automatically generated. .It Sy password -If not empty, password is encoded with +If not empty, password is encoded with .Xr crypt 3 . .El .Sh UNIQUE GROUPS -Perhaps you're missing what +Perhaps you're missing what .Em can be done with this scheme that falls apart with most other schemes. With each user in his/her own group the user can @@ -129,33 +129,33 @@ Check /etc/passwd, /etc/group, /etc/shells and exit. .It Fl class Ar login_class Set default login class. .It Fl config_create -Create new configuration and message file and exit. +Create new configuration and message file and exit. .It Fl dotdir Ar directory -Copy files from -.Ar directory +Copy files from +.Ar directory into the .Ev HOME directory of new users, .Ql Pa dot.foo -will be renamed to +will be renamed to .Ql Pa .foo . Don't copy files if -.Ar directory +.Ar directory specified is equal to .Ar no . For security make all files writable and readable for owner, don't allow group or world to write files and allow only owner -to read/execute/write -.Pa .rhost , -.Pa .Xauthority , -.Pa .kermrc , -.Pa .netrc , +to read/execute/write +.Pa .rhost , +.Pa .Xauthority , +.Pa .kermrc , +.Pa .netrc , .Pa Mail , -.Pa prv , -.Pa iscreen , +.Pa prv , +.Pa iscreen , .Pa term . .It Fl group Ar login_group -Login group. +Login group. .Ar USER means that the username is to be used as login group. .It Fl help , h , \&? @@ -168,16 +168,16 @@ Send new users a welcome message from Specifying a value of .Ar no for -.Ar file +.Ar file causes no message to be sent to new users. .It Fl noconfig Do not read the default configuration file. -.It Fl shell Ar shell +.It Fl shell Ar shell Default shell for new users. .It Fl silent , s , quiet , q -Few warnings, questions, bug reports. +Few warnings, questions, bug reports. .It Fl uid Ar uid -Use uid's from +Use uid's from .Ar uid on up. .It Fl verbose , v @@ -187,11 +187,11 @@ Recommended for novice users. .Sh FORMATS .Bl -tag -width Ds -compact .Ql Pa # -is a comment. +is a comment. .It Sy configuration file .Nm Adduser -reads and writes this file. -See +reads and writes this file. +See .Pa /etc/adduser.conf for more details. .It Sy message file diff --git a/usr.sbin/adduser/rmuser.8 b/usr.sbin/adduser/rmuser.8 index 4e7ca4c..30ecf02 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/adduser/rmuser.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/adduser/rmuser.8 @@ -42,11 +42,11 @@ The utility .Pp .Bl -enum .It -Removes the user's +Removes the user's .Xr crontab 1 entry (if any). .It -Removes any +Removes any .Xr at 1 jobs belonging to the user. .It @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ including handling of symbolic links in the path to the actual home directory. .It Removes the incoming mail and pop daemon mail files belonging to the -user from +user from .Pa /var/mail . .It Removes all files owned by the user from diff --git a/usr.sbin/ancontrol/ancontrol.8 b/usr.sbin/ancontrol/ancontrol.8 index 4488e03..a89514e 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/ancontrol/ancontrol.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/ancontrol/ancontrol.8 @@ -54,26 +54,26 @@ .Nm .Fl i Ar iface Fl s Ar 0|1|2|3 .Nm -.Fl i Ar iface +.Fl i Ar iface .Op Fl v Ar 1|2|3|4 .Fl a Ar AP .Nm .Fl i Ar iface Fl b Ar beacon period .Nm -.Fl i Ar iface +.Fl i Ar iface .Op Fl v Ar 0|1 .Fl d Ar 0|1|2|3 .Nm .Fl i Ar iface Fl e Ar 0|1|2|4 .Nm -.Fl i Ar iface +.Fl i Ar iface .Op Fl v Ar 0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7 .Fl k Ar key .Nm -.Fl i Ar iface +.Fl i Ar iface .Fl K Ar mode .Nm -.Fl i Ar iface +.Fl i Ar iface .Fl W Ar mode .Nm .Fl i Ar iface Fl j Ar netjoin timeout @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ .Nm .Fl i Ar iface Fl m Ar mac address .Nm -.Fl i Ar iface +.Fl i Ar iface .Op Fl v Ar 1|2|3 .Fl n Ar SSID .Nm @@ -428,7 +428,7 @@ ancontrol -i an0 -W 1 ancontrol -i an0 -e 0 .Ed .Pp -Sets a WEP key 0, enables "Shared Key" authentication, enables full WEP +Sets a WEP key 0, enables "Shared Key" authentication, enables full WEP and uses transmit key 0. .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr an 4 , diff --git a/usr.sbin/apm/apm.8 b/usr.sbin/apm/apm.8 index fc36deb..cb2647e 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/apm/apm.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/apm/apm.8 @@ -1,12 +1,12 @@ .\" LP (Laptop Package) -.\" +.\" .\" Copyright (c) 1994 by Tatsumi Hosokawa <hosokawa@jp.FreeBSD.org> -.\" +.\" .\" This software may be used, modified, copied, and distributed, in .\" both source and binary form provided that the above copyright and -.\" these terms are retained. Under no circumstances is the author -.\" responsible for the proper functioning of this software, nor does -.\" the author assume any responsibility for damages incurred with its +.\" these terms are retained. Under no circumstances is the author +.\" responsible for the proper functioning of this software, nor does +.\" the author assume any responsibility for damages incurred with its .\" .\" $FreeBSD$ .\" @@ -28,12 +28,12 @@ .Nm zzz .Sh DESCRIPTION .Nm Apm -controls the Intel / Microsoft APM (Advanced Power Management) BIOS and +controls the Intel / Microsoft APM (Advanced Power Management) BIOS and displays the current status of APM on laptop PCs. -.Nm Zzz +.Nm Zzz suspends the system by controlling APM. .Pp -The following options are available for +The following options are available for .Nm (no options are available for .Nm zzz @@ -46,18 +46,18 @@ per line in the order given here. .Bl -tag -width indent .It Fl a Display the current AC-line status as an integer value. The values -0 and 1 correspond to the +0 and 1 correspond to the .Dq off-line state or .Dq on-line state, respectively. .It Fl b Display an integer value reflecting the current battery status. -The values 0, 1, 2, 3, correspond to the +The values 0, 1, 2, 3, correspond to the .Dq high -status, +status, .Dq low -status, +status, .Dq critical status, .Dq charging @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ See .Xr apm 4 for details. .It Fl l -Display the remaining battery percentage. If your laptop does not +Display the remaining battery percentage. If your laptop does not support this function, 255 is displayed. .It Fl r Ar delta Enable the resume wakeup timer, if the laptop supports it. This @@ -122,14 +122,14 @@ On such systems, .Nm displays them as unknown. .Pp -Some APM implementations cannot handle events such as pushing the +Some APM implementations cannot handle events such as pushing the power button or closing the cover. On such implementations, the system .Ar must be suspended .Ar only by using .Nm -or +or .Nm zzz . .Sh NOTES .Xr apmconf 8 diff --git a/usr.sbin/apmd/apmd.8 b/usr.sbin/apmd/apmd.8 index f85688f..f11700a 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/apmd/apmd.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/apmd/apmd.8 @@ -52,17 +52,17 @@ all other events are ignored. For each event posted by the APM BIOS, invokes the sequence of commands specified in the configuration file. When .Nm -is running with monitoring suspend/standby requests, -the kernel will not process those requests. +is running with monitoring suspend/standby requests, +the kernel will not process those requests. Therefore, if you wish action to be taken when these events -occur, you need to explicitly configure the appropriate commands or +occur, you need to explicitly configure the appropriate commands or built-in functions in the configuration file. .Pp .Nm Apmd recognizes the following runtime options: .Bl -tag -width -f_file .It Fl d -Starts in debug mode. This causes +Starts in debug mode. This causes .Nm to execute in the foreground instead of in daemon mode. .It Fl f Ar file @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ and notifies the set of events to be monitored to the APM device driver. When it terminates, the APM device driver automatically cancels monitored events. .Pp -If the +If the .Nm process receives a SIGHUP, it will reread its configuration file and notify the APM device driver of any changes to its configuration. @@ -100,14 +100,14 @@ This device file is opened exclusively, so only a single .Nm process can be running at any time. .Pp -When +When .Nm receives an APM event, it forks a child process to execute the commands specified in the configuration file and then continues listening for more events. The child process executes the commands specified, one at a time and in the order that they are listed. .Pp -While +While .Nm is processing the command list for SUSPEND/STANDBY requests, the APM kernel device driver issues notifications to APM BIOS once per second so that the @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ apm_event SUSPENDREQ { will cause .Nm to receive the APM event -.Ql SUSPENDREQ +.Ql SUSPENDREQ (which may be posted by an LCD close), run the .Ql sync command 3 times and wait for a while, then execute @@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ after kernel handling: .It CAPABILITIESCHANGE .El .Pp -Other events will not be sent to +Other events will not be sent to .Nm . .El .Ed @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ command line syntax In the example above, the three lines begining with .Ql exec are commands for the event. -Each line should be terminated with a semicolon. +Each line should be terminated with a semicolon. The command list for the event should be enclosed by .Ql { and @@ -210,10 +210,10 @@ uses for double-quotation enclosed command execution, just as with .Xr system 3 . Each command is executed in order until the end of -the list is reached or a command finishes with a non-zero status code. +the list is reached or a command finishes with a non-zero status code. .Nm will report any failed command's status code via -.Xr syslog 3 +.Xr syslog 3 and will then reject the request event posted by the APM BIOS. .Ed .It diff --git a/usr.sbin/arp/arp.4 b/usr.sbin/arp/arp.4 index 50c4925..fbec0be 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/arp/arp.4 +++ b/usr.sbin/arp/arp.4 @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ It is used by all the 10Mb/s Ethernet interface drivers. It is not specific to Internet protocols or to 10Mb/s Ethernet, but this implementation currently supports only that combination. .Pp -ARP caches Internet-Ethernet address mappings. +ARP caches Internet-Ethernet address mappings. When an interface requests a mapping for an address not in the cache, ARP queues the message which requires the mapping and broadcasts a message on the associated network requesting the address mapping. diff --git a/usr.sbin/arp/arp.8 b/usr.sbin/arp/arp.8 index da23831..da9f08b 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/arp/arp.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/arp/arp.8 @@ -108,12 +108,12 @@ Create an .Tn ARP entry for the host called .Ar hostname -with the Ethernet address +with the Ethernet address .Ar ether_addr . The Ethernet address is given as six hex bytes separated by colons. The entry will be permanent unless the word .Cm temp -is given in the command. +is given in the command. If the word .Cm pub is given, the entry will be @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ i.e., this system will act as an .Tn ARP server, -responding to requests for +responding to requests for .Ar hostname even though the host address is not its own. In this case the diff --git a/usr.sbin/boot98cfg/boot98cfg.8 b/usr.sbin/boot98cfg/boot98cfg.8 index 8643f56..4fae283 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/boot98cfg/boot98cfg.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/boot98cfg/boot98cfg.8 @@ -1,12 +1,12 @@ .\" Copyright (c) KATO Takenori, 2000. -.\" +.\" .\" All rights reserved. Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright .\" laws of Japan. -.\" +.\" .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions .\" are met: -.\" +.\" .\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright .\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer as .\" the first lines of this file unmodified. @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ .\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. .\" 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products .\" derived from this software without specific prior written permission. -.\" +.\" .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ than that in the format command. The options are: .Bl -tag -width indent .It Fl B -Install the IPL and HDD boot menu. This option causes the IPL and HDD +Install the IPL and HDD boot menu. This option causes the IPL and HDD boot menu code to be replaced. .It Fl i Ar boot0 Specify which IPL image to use. The default is /boot/boot0. @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Specify which IPL image to use. The default is /boot/boot0. Specify which HDD boot menu image to use. The default is /boot/boot0.5. .It Fl f Ar boot0.bak -Specify that a backup copy of the preexisting IPL should be written to +Specify that a backup copy of the preexisting IPL should be written to .Ar boot0.bak . This file is created if it does not exist, and truncated if it does. .It Fl F Ar boot0.5.bak diff --git a/usr.sbin/bootparamd/bootparamd/bootparamd.8 b/usr.sbin/bootparamd/bootparamd/bootparamd.8 index 622e7cb..c83ff30 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/bootparamd/bootparamd/bootparamd.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/bootparamd/bootparamd/bootparamd.8 @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ is a server process that provides information to clients necessary for booting. It consults the .Pa /etc/bootparams -file. +file. .Pp This version will allow the use of aliases on the hostname in the .Pa /etc/bootparams @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ file. The returned hostname to the .Em whoami request done by the booting client -will be the name that appears in +will be the name that appears in .Pa /etc/bootparams and not the canonical name. In this way you can keep the answer short enough @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ default boot parameter file When netbooting diskless SunOS/Xkernel SPARCstations the booted SunOS kernel also broadcasts to the all-0 address. The SunOS kernel hangs until it receives a reply. -To accommodate this behaviour add an alias address +To accommodate this behaviour add an alias address that responds to an all-0 broadcast. So, add something like .Ql "ifconfig xl0 192.168.200.254 netmask 255.255.255.255 broadcast 192.168.200.0 alias diff --git a/usr.sbin/cdcontrol/cdcontrol.1 b/usr.sbin/cdcontrol/cdcontrol.1 index e098f59..1b08de2 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/cdcontrol/cdcontrol.1 +++ b/usr.sbin/cdcontrol/cdcontrol.1 @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ The device is a name such as .Pa cd0 or -.Pa mcd0 . +.Pa mcd0 . .Pp If no command is given, then .Nm @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ characters as are required to uniquely identify a command need be specified. The word .Cm play -can be omitted or the characters +can be omitted or the characters .Dq + and .Dq - @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ and .Cm prev . .Bl -tag -width Cm .It Cm play Ar first_track Op Ar last_track -Play from track +Play from track .Ar first_track to track .Ar last_track . @@ -69,17 +69,17 @@ Can be omitted in all cases. .Ar end_f Oc .Xc Play from the absolute address -(MSF) defined by +(MSF) defined by .Ar start_m -in minutes, +in minutes, .Ar start_s , -in seconds and +in seconds and .Ar start_f (frame number) to the absolute address defined by .Ar end_m -in minutes, +in minutes, .Ar end_s , -in seconds and +in seconds and .Ar end_f (frame number). Minutes are in the range 0-99. Seconds are in the range 0-59. @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Stop playing. Do not stop the disc. .It Cm resume Resume playing. -Used after the +Used after the .Em pause command. .It Cm stop @@ -109,11 +109,11 @@ Eject the disc. .It Cm close Inject the disc. .It Cm volume Ar left_channel Ar right_channel -Set the volume of left channel to +Set the volume of left channel to .Ar left_channel -and the volume of right channel to -.Ar right_channel . -Allowed values are in the range 0-255. +and the volume of right channel to +.Ar right_channel . +Allowed values are in the range 0-255. .It Cm volume Ar mute Turn the sound off. .It Cm volume Ar mono diff --git a/usr.sbin/ckdist/ckdist.1 b/usr.sbin/ckdist/ckdist.1 index 997b6d1..2254fee 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/ckdist/ckdist.1 +++ b/usr.sbin/ckdist/ckdist.1 @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ .\" .Dd January 20, 1997 .Dt CKDIST 1 -.Os +.Os .Sh NAME .Nm ckdist .Nd check software distributions @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ The operands may refer to regular files or to directories. Regular files named "md5", or which have an ".md5" or an ".inf" extension, are assumed to be of the implied type, otherwise format is determined from -content. If a directory is specified, it is searched for +content. If a directory is specified, it is searched for appropriately-named files only. .Pp Options are as follows: @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ extension to the filename. Assume that all specified checksum files are of the format .Ar type , and search directories only for files in this format (where -.Ar type +.Ar type is either "md5" or "inf"). .El .Sh SEE ALSO diff --git a/usr.sbin/config/config.8 b/usr.sbin/config/config.8 index 9810e5a..17dc786 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/config/config.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/config/config.8 @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ It understands the old autoconfiguration scheme used on the HP300, i386, DECstation, and derivative platforms. The new version of config is used with the SPARC platform. -Only the version of +Only the version of .Nm applicable to the architecture that you are running will be installed on your machine. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ creates the directory .Pa ../compile/SYSTEM_NAME or the one given with the .Fl d -option +option as necessary and places all output files there. The output of .Nm @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ should be run again. Attempts to compile a system that had configuration errors are likely to fail. .Pp -If the option "INCLUDE_CONFIG_FILE" is used in the configuration file the +If the option "INCLUDE_CONFIG_FILE" is used in the configuration file the entire input file is embedded in the new kernel. This means that .Xr strings 1 can be used to extract it from a kernel: @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ system when compiling a kernel. A debug kernel contains complete symbols for all the source files, and enables an experienced kernel programmer to analyse the cause of a problem. The debuggers available prior to 4.4BSD-Lite were able to find some information -from a normal kernel; +from a normal kernel; .Xr gdb 1 provides very little support for normal kernels, and a debug kernel is needed for any meaningful analysis. diff --git a/usr.sbin/cron/cron/cron.8 b/usr.sbin/cron/cron/cron.8 index da6b9d7..9ac8823 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/cron/cron/cron.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/cron/cron/cron.8 @@ -14,9 +14,9 @@ .\" * I'll try to keep a version up to date. I can be reached as follows: .\" * Paul Vixie <paul@vix.com> uunet!decwrl!vixie!paul .\" */ -.\" +.\" .\" $FreeBSD$ -.\" +.\" .Dd December 20, 1993 .Dt CRON 8 .Os @@ -81,9 +81,9 @@ Enable special handling of situations when the GMT offset of the local timezone changes, such as the switches between the standard time and daylight saving time. .Pp -The jobs run during the GMT offset changes time as +The jobs run during the GMT offset changes time as intuitively expected. -If a job falls into a time interval that disappears +If a job falls into a time interval that disappears (for example, during the switch from standard time) to daylight saving time or is duplicated (for example, during the reverse switch), then it's handled @@ -92,12 +92,12 @@ in one of two ways: The first case is for the jobs that run every at hour of a time interval overlapping with the disappearing or duplicated interval. In other words, if the job had run within one hour before the GMT offset change -(and cron was not restarted nor the +(and cron was not restarted nor the .Xr crontab 5 changed after that) or would run after the change at the next hour. They work as always, skip the skipped time or run in the added -time as usual. +time as usual. .Pp The second case is for the jobs that run less frequently. They are executed exactly once, they are not skipped nor @@ -106,10 +106,10 @@ executed twice (unless cron is restarted or the user's is changed during such a time interval). If an interval disappears due to the GMT offset change, such jobs are -executed at the same absolute point of time as they would be in the +executed at the same absolute point of time as they would be in the old time zone. -For example, if exactly one hour disappears, this -point would be during the next hour at the first minute that is +For example, if exactly one hour disappears, this +point would be during the next hour at the first minute that is specified for them in .Xr crontab 5 . .It Fl o @@ -123,6 +123,6 @@ are specified, the option specified last wins. .El .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr crontab 1 , -.Xr crontab 5 +.Xr crontab 5 .Sh AUTHORS .An Paul Vixie Aq paul@vix.com diff --git a/usr.sbin/cron/crontab/crontab.5 b/usr.sbin/cron/crontab/crontab.5 index 1fd759d..fe19ce6 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/cron/crontab/crontab.5 +++ b/usr.sbin/cron/crontab/crontab.5 @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ .\" */ .\" .\" $FreeBSD$ -.\" +.\" .Dd January 24, 1994 .Dt CRONTAB 5 .Os @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ and and .Ev HOME are set from the -.Pa /etc/passwd +.Pa /etc/passwd line of the crontab's owner. .Ev HOME and @@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ are extensions. If you're in one of the 70-odd countries that observe Daylight Savings Time, jobs scheduled during the rollback or advance will be affected. In general, it's not a good idea to schedule jobs during -this period. +this period. .Pp For US timezones (except parts of IN, AZ, and HI) the time shift occurs at 2AM local time. For others, the output of the diff --git a/usr.sbin/crunch/crunchide/crunchide.1 b/usr.sbin/crunch/crunchide/crunchide.1 index 1f9f9a3..cf74558 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/crunch/crunchide/crunchide.1 +++ b/usr.sbin/crunch/crunchide/crunchide.1 @@ -39,11 +39,11 @@ .Nm Crunchide hides the global symbols of .Ar object-file -such that they are ignored by subsequent runs of the linker, +such that they are ignored by subsequent runs of the linker, .Xr ld 1 . Some symbols may be left visible via the .Fl k Ar keep-symbol -and +and .Fl f Ar keep-list-file options. The .Ar keep-list-file @@ -53,14 +53,14 @@ The names given by or in .Ar keep-list-file should be C names. For example, -to keep the C function +to keep the C function .Dq foo -visible, the option -.Dq -k foo +visible, the option +.Dq -k foo should be used. .Pp .Nm Crunchide -is designed as a companion program for +is designed as a companion program for .Xr crunchgen 1 , which automates the process of creating crunched binaries from multiple component programs. diff --git a/usr.sbin/ctm/ctm/ctm.1 b/usr.sbin/ctm/ctm/ctm.1 index 4834377..5fb87dc 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/ctm/ctm/ctm.1 +++ b/usr.sbin/ctm/ctm/ctm.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\"---------------------------------------------------------------------------- -.\""THE BEER-WARE LICENSE" (Revision 42): +.\""THE BEER-WARE LICENSE" (Revision 42): .\"<joerg@freebsd.org> wrote this file. As long as you retain this notice you .\"can do whatever you want with this stuff. If we meet some day, and you think .\"this stuff is worth it, you can buy me a beer in return. Joerg Wunsch @@ -73,21 +73,21 @@ will simply reject the input file. .Pp Pass 2 will validate that the directory tree is in the state expected by the CTM delta. This is done by looking for files and directories which -should/should not exist and by checking the MD5 checksums of files. +should/should not exist and by checking the MD5 checksums of files. .Pp If a .Ar backup-file -had been specified using the +had been specified using the .Fl B -option, all files that would be modified by this +option, all files that would be modified by this .Nm invocation are backed up -to this file using the archiver command specified by the +to this file using the archiver command specified by the .Fl t option. The default archiver command is .Nm "tar -rf %s -T -" . .Pp -Pass 3 will actually apply the delta. +Pass 3 will actually apply the delta. .Pp The list of files that would be modified by .Nm @@ -99,10 +99,10 @@ and options. The .Fl e -and +and .Fl x options are applied in order of appearance on the command line. The last -filter that matched a given file name determines whether the file would be +filter that matched a given file name determines whether the file would be operated on or left alone by .Nm . .Pp @@ -136,13 +136,13 @@ Match each name in the CTM file against and if it matches process the file, otherwise leave it alone. There may be any number of these options. Use of this option disables the .Pa .ctm_status -sequence number checks. For example, the expression -.Ic ^usr.sbin/ctm +sequence number checks. For example, the expression +.Ic ^usr.sbin/ctm for example, will select the .Pa usr.sbin/ctm -source directory and all pathnames under it. +source directory and all pathnames under it. .Pp -Pathnames can be disabled from being considered by CTM using the +Pathnames can be disabled from being considered by CTM using the .Fl x option. .It Fl F @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ option disables the .Pa .ctm_status checks and integrity checks on the source tree being operated on. The .Fl l -option can be combined with the +option can be combined with the .Fl e and .Fl x @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ instead of the default archiver .Nm tar . This option takes effect only if a backup file had been specified using the .Fl B -option. A %s in the tar command will be replaced by the name of the backup +option. A %s in the tar command will be replaced by the name of the backup file. .It Fl T Ar tmpdir Put temporary files under @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ Match each name in the CTM file against and if it matches, leave the file alone. There may be any number of these options. Use of this option disables the .Pa .ctm_status -sequence number checks. +sequence number checks. .Pp Pathnames can be selected for CTM's consideration using the .Fl e @@ -280,7 +280,7 @@ options. .Sh HISTORY Initial trials were run during the work on .Fx 1.1.5 , -and many bugs and +and many bugs and methods were hashed out. .Pp The diff --git a/usr.sbin/ctm/ctm/ctm.5 b/usr.sbin/ctm/ctm/ctm.5 index ac67d4f..a6053e1 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/ctm/ctm/ctm.5 +++ b/usr.sbin/ctm/ctm/ctm.5 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\"---------------------------------------------------------------------------- -.\""THE BEER-WARE LICENSE" (Revision 42): +.\""THE BEER-WARE LICENSE" (Revision 42): .\"<joerg@freebsd.org> wrote this file. As long as you retain this notice you .\"can do whatever you want with this stuff. If we meet some day, and you think .\"this stuff is worth it, you can buy me a beer in return. Joerg Wunsch @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ field is currently not implemented. .It _END Ar md5 This statement ends the CTM delta, the global .Ar md5 -checksum is matched against the MD5 checksum of the entire delta, up to +checksum is matched against the MD5 checksum of the entire delta, up to and including the space (0x20) character following ``_END''. .It \&FM Ar name uid gid mode md5 count Make the file @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ CTM_END 74ddd298d76215ae45a077a4b6a74e9c .Sh HISTORY Initial trials ran during the .Fx 1.1.5 , -and many bugs and +and many bugs and methods were hashed out. The CTM system has been made publicly available in .Fx 2.1 . diff --git a/usr.sbin/dev_mkdb/dev_mkdb.8 b/usr.sbin/dev_mkdb/dev_mkdb.8 index 097009f..d386110 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/dev_mkdb/dev_mkdb.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/dev_mkdb/dev_mkdb.8 @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ hash access method database in which contains the names of all of the character and block special files in the .Pa /dev -directory, using the file type and the +directory, using the file type and the .Fa st_rdev field as the key. .Pp diff --git a/usr.sbin/diskpart/diskpart.8 b/usr.sbin/diskpart/diskpart.8 index c1e8589..b19a6d2 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/diskpart/diskpart.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/diskpart/diskpart.8 @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ e unused 55936 55936 307200 h unused unused 291346 291346 .El .Pp -If an unknown disk type is specified, +If an unknown disk type is specified, .Nm will prompt for the required disk geometry information. .Sh SEE ALSO diff --git a/usr.sbin/elf2exe/elf2exe.8 b/usr.sbin/elf2exe/elf2exe.8 index af447ae..af33bbe 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/elf2exe/elf2exe.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/elf2exe/elf2exe.8 @@ -24,24 +24,24 @@ .Sh DESCRIPTION .Nm Elf2exe creates an executable that can be loaded by the AlphaBIOS or ARCS consoles -as found on systems designed for +as found on systems designed for .Tn Windows/NT . -The input file must have been -created as a non-relocatable standalone binary with a load address within +The input file must have been +created as a non-relocatable standalone binary with a load address within the memory range available for user programs (0x80000000 to 0x806fdfff and 0x80900000 to at least 0x80ffffff). .Pp -The command prints a list of sections found in the ELF executable and the +The command prints a list of sections found in the ELF executable and the section sizes and offsets of the output file for diagnostic purposes. .Pp -Given an object file +Given an object file .Pa src.o the following two commands will create a binary for ARCS: .Dl ld \-o a.out \-M \-N \-Ttext 0x80900000 src.o\c .Dl elf2exe a.out a.exe\c .Sh BUGS .Nm Elf2exe -does not even attempt to verify that the input file matches the requirements +does not even attempt to verify that the input file matches the requirements for an ARC executable. .Sh HISTORY The diff --git a/usr.sbin/faithd/faithd.8 b/usr.sbin/faithd/faithd.8 index b489a48..9a51d76 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/faithd/faithd.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/faithd/faithd.8 @@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ The directives are evaluated in sequence, and the first matching entry will be effective. .Pp With inetd mode, -traffic may be filtered by using access control functionality in +traffic may be filtered by using access control functionality in .Xr inetd 8 . .Sh EXAMPLES Before invoking diff --git a/usr.sbin/fdcontrol/fdcontrol.8 b/usr.sbin/fdcontrol/fdcontrol.8 index 2829a2b..ac4e217 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/fdcontrol/fdcontrol.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/fdcontrol/fdcontrol.8 @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ -.\" +.\" .\" Copyright (C) 1994 by Joerg Wunsch, Dresden .\" All rights reserved. -.\" +.\" .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions .\" are met: @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ .\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright .\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the .\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. -.\" +.\" .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR diff --git a/usr.sbin/fdwrite/fdwrite.1 b/usr.sbin/fdwrite/fdwrite.1 index 0c7c4d0..b6f933d 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/fdwrite/fdwrite.1 +++ b/usr.sbin/fdwrite/fdwrite.1 @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ The options are as follows: .It Fl v Toggle verbosity on stdout. Default is ``on''. -After +After .Ar device is opened first time the format will be printed. During operation progress will be reported with the number of tracks diff --git a/usr.sbin/getextattr/getextattr.8 b/usr.sbin/getextattr/getextattr.8 index f02b906..1ffd038 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/getextattr/getextattr.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/getextattr/getextattr.8 @@ -77,8 +77,8 @@ and the attribute must of defined for the file queried. .Bd -literal -offset indent # getextattr system md5 /kernel /kernel: - 61 61 33 62 39 39 66 65 31 35 35 32 31 62 65 32 - 62 36 38 36 62 31 66 39 63 64 33 39 35 36 36 31 + 61 61 33 62 39 39 66 65 31 35 35 32 31 62 65 32 + 62 36 38 36 62 31 66 39 63 64 33 39 35 36 36 31 # getextattr -s system md5 /kernel /kernel: "aa3b99fe15521be2b686b1f9cd395661" .Ed diff --git a/usr.sbin/gifconfig/gifconfig.8 b/usr.sbin/gifconfig/gifconfig.8 index 26b4dd6..ec04354 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/gifconfig/gifconfig.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/gifconfig/gifconfig.8 @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ .\" .\" Copyright (C) 1995, 1996, 1997, and 1998 WIDE Project. .\" All rights reserved. -.\" +.\" .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions .\" are met: @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ .\" 3. Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors .\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software .\" without specific prior written permission. -.\" +.\" .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND .\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE diff --git a/usr.sbin/i4b/dtmfdecode/dtmfdecode.1 b/usr.sbin/i4b/dtmfdecode/dtmfdecode.1 index 394d840..1bb5528 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/i4b/dtmfdecode/dtmfdecode.1 +++ b/usr.sbin/i4b/dtmfdecode/dtmfdecode.1 @@ -46,12 +46,12 @@ It reads audio G.711 A-Law coded data from stdin and outputs the detected numbers values as ASCII charcters to stdout. .Pp The detector is implemented as 8 narrow band-pass filters realized with -an integer double-cross recursive algorithm. Various ad-hoc methods are +an integer double-cross recursive algorithm. Various ad-hoc methods are employed to provide hysteresis and anti-bounce for the detected signals. .Sh EXAMPLES The command: .Bd -literal -offset indent -dtmfdecode < beep.al +dtmfdecode < beep.al .Ed .Pp will print a "1" to stdout. @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ ITU Recommendations G.711 .An -nosplit The .Nm -utility was written by +utility was written by .An Poul-Henning Kamp Aq phk@FreeBSD.org . -This man page was written by +This man page was written by .An Hellmuth Michaelis Aq hm@FreeBSD.org . diff --git a/usr.sbin/i4b/g711conv/g711conv.1 b/usr.sbin/i4b/g711conv/g711conv.1 index f163053..ad20a52 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/i4b/g711conv/g711conv.1 +++ b/usr.sbin/i4b/g711conv/g711conv.1 @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ bits of the result and moves that to an active isdn4bsd telephone connection. .Sh AUTHORS The .Nm -utility and this manpage were written by +utility and this manpage were written by .An Hellmuth Michaelis Aq hm@kts.org -based on the G.711 conversion reference code written by Sun Microsystems, +based on the G.711 conversion reference code written by Sun Microsystems, Inc. and code contributed to isdn4bsd by Stefan Bethke. diff --git a/usr.sbin/i4b/isdnd/isdnd.acct.5 b/usr.sbin/i4b/isdnd/isdnd.acct.5 index 538c4f7..fdb30d3 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/i4b/isdnd/isdnd.acct.5 +++ b/usr.sbin/i4b/isdnd/isdnd.acct.5 @@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ .\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" -.\" $Id: isdnd.acct.5,v 1.11 1999/12/13 22:11:55 hm Exp $ +.\" $Id: isdnd.acct.5,v 1.11 1999/12/13 22:11:55 hm Exp $ .\" .\" $FreeBSD$ .\" @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ This is a typical accounting line: .Xr isdnd.rc 5 , .Xr isdnd 8 .Sh AUTHORS -The +The .Xr isdnd 8 -daemon and this manual page were written by +daemon and this manual page were written by .An Hellmuth Michaelis Aq hm@kts.org . diff --git a/usr.sbin/i4b/isdnd/isdnd.rates.5 b/usr.sbin/i4b/isdnd/isdnd.rates.5 index 4752859..7ada783 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/i4b/isdnd/isdnd.rates.5 +++ b/usr.sbin/i4b/isdnd/isdnd.rates.5 @@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ .\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" -.\" $Id: isdnd.rates.5,v 1.10 1999/12/13 22:11:55 hm Exp $ +.\" $Id: isdnd.rates.5,v 1.10 1999/12/13 22:11:55 hm Exp $ .\" .\" $FreeBSD$ .\" @@ -41,14 +41,14 @@ contains descriptions how long charging units last at a given time of day, day of week and the distance to the destination. If this file is available, this information may be used by the .Xr isdnd 8 -ISDN connection management daemon to calculate the short hold time for a +ISDN connection management daemon to calculate the short hold time for a connection. .Pp The format of a rate entry line is as follows: .Pp The first field, the .Pq Fa rate-code -defines a collection of rates (for each day of the week) which can be +defines a collection of rates (for each day of the week) which can be referenced in the .Xr isdnd 8 configuration file @@ -104,10 +104,10 @@ The rates subsystem for the .Xr isdnd 8 daemon to which .Nm -belongs was designed and written by +belongs was designed and written by .An Gary Jennejohn . .Pp The .Xr isdnd 8 -daemon and this manual page were written by +daemon and this manual page were written by .An Hellmuth Michaelis Aq hm@kts.org . diff --git a/usr.sbin/i4b/isdnd/isdnd.rc.5 b/usr.sbin/i4b/isdnd/isdnd.rc.5 index b2ea569..ee5be5c 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/i4b/isdnd/isdnd.rc.5 +++ b/usr.sbin/i4b/isdnd/isdnd.rc.5 @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ The file .Pa /etc/isdn/isdnd.rc contains (if not otherwise specified on the command line) the runtime -configuration for the +configuration for the .Xr isdnd 8 ISDN connection management daemon which is part of the isdn4bsd package. .Pp @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ sections and one or more sections. In the .Em system -section parameters regarding the daemon operation or parameters +section parameters regarding the daemon operation or parameters not associated with a single remote connection can be set. In the .Em controller @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ The following keywords are recognized by .Bl -tag -width system .It Li system This keyword starts the system configuration section. -It must not +It must not have a parameter and may be used only once. The keyword is mandatory. The following keywords are valid in the system configuration section: @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ or no charging information is available or is not subscribed. .It Li acctfile Specifies the name of the accounting file which is used when the keyword .Em useacctfile -(see below) is set to +(see below) is set to .Em on . See also system keyword .Em rotatesuffix . @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ The default is off. (optional) .It Li aliasfile Specifies the name of the telephone number-to-name alias database file shared -with the +with the .Xr isdntel 1 utility when alias processing is enabled via the .Em aliasing @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ The default is off. (optional) .It Li mailer This keyword is used to specify the path/name of a mail program which -which is able to use the "-s" flag to specify a subject on its +which is able to use the "-s" flag to specify a subject on its command line. In case of a fatal error exit of .Nm @@ -161,8 +161,8 @@ in case of a fatal error exit of (optional) .It Li monitor-allowed If this parameter is set to -.Em on -or +.Em on +or .Em yes , monitoring via a local or remote machine is enabled. This parameter is optional and is set to @@ -174,8 +174,8 @@ This integer parameter is optional and is set to port 451 by default. .It Li monitor This keyword specifies a local socket name or a host or network for remote monitoring. -The -.Em monitor +The +.Em monitor specification may either be: .Pp .Bl -tag -width Ds -compact @@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ example: localhost example: up-vision-net/24 .El .It Li monitor-access -This keyword specifies the access rights for a previously used +This keyword specifies the access rights for a previously used .Em monitor keyword. The supported access rights are: @@ -251,15 +251,15 @@ If this keyword is omitted, the log-files are just closed and reopened; this is also the default behavior. (optional) .It Li rtprio -Specifies the real-time priority +Specifies the real-time priority .Nm isdnd runs at as an integer value in the range 0...31 with 0 being the highest priority. -This keyword is optional; if not specified the process priority of +This keyword is optional; if not specified the process priority of .Nm isdnd is not touched in any way. ( See also -.Xr rtprio 1 +.Xr rtprio 1 ). This keyword is only available if .Nm @@ -273,15 +273,15 @@ accounting file. .El .It Li controller This keyword starts the controller configuration section. -It must not +It must not have a parameter and may be used once for every controller. The keyword is optional. -The following keywords are valid in a controller +The following keywords are valid in a controller configuration section: .Bl -tag -width useacctfile .It Li protocol -This keyword is used to set the D-channel protocol for the S0-bus a +This keyword is used to set the D-channel protocol for the S0-bus a controller is connected to. The following parameters are currently supported: @@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ No framing at all (used for telephony). .It Li budget-calloutperiod is used to specify a time period in seconds. Within this period, the number of calls -specified by +specified by .Em budget-calloutncalls are allowed to succeed, any further attempt to call out will be blocked for the rest of the time left in the time period. @@ -396,11 +396,11 @@ The time in seconds to wait for a remote site calling back the local site after a call from the local site to the remote site has been made. (optional) .It Li clone -This causes the contents of the specified entry to be copied from the +This causes the contents of the specified entry to be copied from the existing named entry to the current one. When using this feature at least a new entry specific .Ql name -and +and .Ql usrdeviceunit value should be specified for the current entry. .It Li connectprog @@ -411,11 +411,11 @@ expects to find the program below the path .Pa /etc/isdn which is prepended to the string specified as a parameter to this keyword. The programs specified by connect and disconnect will get the following -command line arguments: -d (device) -f (flag) [ -a (addr) ] where +command line arguments: -d (device) -f (flag) [ -a (addr) ] where .Em device -is the name of device, e.g. "isp0", +is the name of device, e.g. "isp0", .Em flag -will be "up" if connection just got up, or "down" if interface changed to down +will be "up" if connection just got up, or "down" if interface changed to down state and .Em addr the address that got assigned to the interface as a dotted-quad ip address @@ -495,8 +495,8 @@ seconds). further up). This keyword is optional. .It Li downtime -is used to configure the time in seconds an interface is disabled -after the configured number of +is used to configure the time in seconds an interface is disabled +after the configured number of .Em downtries . (see also the keyword .Em usedown @@ -536,20 +536,20 @@ this channel but mark the request as .Em preferred (the indicated channel is preferred) instead of exclusive (only the indicated channel is acceptable). -Thus the exchange is still free to select another +Thus the exchange is still free to select another than the requested channel! (mandatory) .It Li isdntxdel-incoming A delay value suitable for the .Xr timeout 9 kernel subroutine to delay the transmission of the first packet after a -successful connection is made by this value for +successful connection is made by this value for .Em incoming ISDN connections. The specification unit is 1/100 second. A zero (0) disables this feature and is the default value. -This feature is implemented (and makes +This feature is implemented (and makes sense only) for the .Xr i4bipr 4 IP over raw HDLC ISDN driver. @@ -558,11 +558,11 @@ IP over raw HDLC ISDN driver. A delay value suitable for the .Xr timeout 9 kernel subroutine to delay the transmission of the first packet after a -successful connection is made by this value for +successful connection is made by this value for .Em outgoing ISDN connections. The specification unit is 1/100 second. -A zero (0) disables +A zero (0) disables this feature and is the default value. This feature is implemented (and makes sense only) for the @@ -575,13 +575,13 @@ When dialing out to a remote site, the number specified here is put into the .Em "Calling Party Number Information Element" . .Pp -This keyword is mandatory for the -.Em ipr +This keyword is mandatory for the +.Em ipr user-land interfaces. .It Li local-phone-incoming The local telephone number used for verifying the destination of incoming calls. -When a remote site dials in, this number is used to verify that it +When a remote site dials in, this number is used to verify that it is the local site which the remote site wants to connect to. It is compared with the @@ -600,10 +600,10 @@ to a remote site and for accounting purposes. .It Li ppp-auth-paranoid If set to .Em no , -the remote site is not required to prove its authentity for connections +the remote site is not required to prove its authentity for connections that are initiated by the local site. -The default is -.Em yes +The default is +.Em yes and requires the remote site to always authenticate. .Pp This keyword is only used if @@ -616,7 +616,7 @@ PPP interface. Set to .Em no , if the other side does not support re-challenging for chap. -The default is +The default is .Em yes , which causes verification of the remote site's authentity once in a while. .Pp @@ -628,34 +628,34 @@ PPP interface. (optional) .It Li ppp-expect-auth The local site expects the authentity of the remote site to be proved by -the specified method. +the specified method. The supported methods are: .Pp .Bl -tag -width Ds -compact .It Ar none Do not require the other side to authenticate. -Typical uses are dial-out to an ISP +Typical uses are dial-out to an ISP (many ISPs do not authenticate themselves to clients) or offering anonymous dial-in at the local site. .It Ar chap -The preferred authentication method, which does not require a password to be sent +The preferred authentication method, which does not require a password to be sent in the clear. .It Ar pap -The unprotected authentication method, which allows anybody watching the wire +The unprotected authentication method, which allows anybody watching the wire to grab name and password. .El .Pp -If +If .Em ppp-auth-paranoid -is set to -.Em no -(the default is +is set to +.Em no +(the default is .Em yes ) outgoing connections will not require the remote site to authenticate itself. .Pp This keyword is only used for the .Em isp -PPP interfaces. +PPP interfaces. (optional) .It Li ppp-expect-name The name that has to be provided by the remote site to prove its authentity. @@ -683,16 +683,16 @@ The currently supported parameters are: .It Ar none The remote site does not expect or support authentication. .It Ar chap -The preferred authentication method, which does not require a password to be sent +The preferred authentication method, which does not require a password to be sent in the clear. .It Ar pap -The unprotected authentication method, which allows anybody watching the wire +The unprotected authentication method, which allows anybody watching the wire to grab name and password. .El .Pp This keyword is only used for the .Em isp -PPP interfaces. +PPP interfaces. (optional) .It Li ppp-send-name The authentication name sent to the remote site. @@ -723,7 +723,7 @@ days of the week & times per day). The time in seconds to wait between dial retries. (optional) .It Li remdial-handling -is used to specify the dialout behavior in case more than one outgoing +is used to specify the dialout behavior in case more than one outgoing number is specified. The currently supported parameters are: .Pp @@ -754,7 +754,7 @@ When a remote site dials in, this number is used to verify that it is the correct remote site which is herewith authorized to connect into the local system. This parameter -is compared against the +is compared against the .Em "Calling Party Number Information Element" got from the telephone exchange. .Pp @@ -774,7 +774,7 @@ The currently configurable values are: .Pp .Bl -tag -width Ds -compact .It Ar none -Then unitlength is not specified anywhere. +Then unitlength is not specified anywhere. .It Ar cmdl Use the unitlength specified on the command line. .It Ar conf @@ -835,7 +835,7 @@ indicator ( see also the .Em holidayfile keyword in the system section ) separated by commas followed by an optional daytime range specification in the form hh:mm-hh:mm. -The weekdays are specified as numbers from 0 to 6 and the number 7 for +The weekdays are specified as numbers from 0 to 6 and the number 7 for holidays: .Pp .Bl -tag -width Ds -compact @@ -891,7 +891,7 @@ unit time: typical values are one to five minutes. Outgoing call disconnect time can be setup in one of three ways: .Bl -tag -width "shorthold mode .It Li simple mode -For simple mode, the +For simple mode, the .Em idle-algorithm-outgoing must be .Em fix-unit-size @@ -899,7 +899,7 @@ and the selected .Em unitlength must be 0 (zero) and .Em idletime-outgoing -greater zero. +greater zero. .Pp The outgoing traffic is constantly monitored, and in case there was not traffic taking place for the time in seconds specified by @@ -908,13 +908,13 @@ the call is closed. .Pp Typical values in simple mode are 10 to 30 seconds. .It Li shorthold mode for fixed unit charging -For shorthold mode, the +For shorthold mode, the .Em idle-algorithm-outgoing must be .Em fix-unit-size and the selected -.Em unitlength -and +.Em unitlength +and .Em idletime-outgoing must be greater than 0 (zero); .Em earlyhangup @@ -938,19 +938,19 @@ at the beginning of the next unit. In case no traffic was detected during the check-window, the line is closed at the end of the check window. .Pp -Notice: +Notice: .Em unitlength must (!) be greater than the sum of .Em idletime-outgoing and .Em earlyhangup ! .It Li shorthold mode for variable unit charging -For shorthold mode, the +For shorthold mode, the .Em idle-algorithm-outgoing must be .Em var-unit-size and the selected -.Em unitlength +.Em unitlength and .Em idletime-outgoing must be greater than 0 (zero); @@ -1001,10 +1001,10 @@ ISDN daemon. .Xr isdnmonitor 8 .Sh AUTHORS .An -nosplit -The +The .Xr isdnd 8 -daemon and this manual page were written by +daemon and this manual page were written by .An Hellmuth Michaelis Aq hm@FreeBSD.org . .Pp -Additions to this manual page by +Additions to this manual page by .An Barry Scott Aq barry@scottb.demon.co.uk . diff --git a/usr.sbin/i4b/isdndebug/isdndebug.8 b/usr.sbin/i4b/isdndebug/isdndebug.8 index 214a493..0db47d0 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/i4b/isdndebug/isdndebug.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/i4b/isdndebug/isdndebug.8 @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ .Op Fl Q .Sh DESCRIPTION .Nm -is part of the isdn4bsd package and is used to control the level of +is part of the isdn4bsd package and is used to control the level of debugging output of the isdn4bsd kernel part. Every layer of the isdn4bsd kernel uses a debugging mask which can be manipulated using this utility. @@ -104,5 +104,5 @@ displays the current debugging level for all ISDN layers .Sh AUTHORS The .Nm -utility and this manpage were written by +utility and this manpage were written by .An Hellmuth Michaelis Aq hm@kts.org . diff --git a/usr.sbin/i4b/isdndecode/isdndecode.8 b/usr.sbin/i4b/isdndecode/isdndecode.8 index 6cc1cba..86b0496 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/i4b/isdndecode/isdndecode.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/i4b/isdndecode/isdndecode.8 @@ -53,8 +53,8 @@ .Op Fl T Ar unit .Sh DESCRIPTION .Nm -is part of the isdn4bsd package and is used to provide the user with a -detailed mnemonic display of the layers 1, 2 and 3 protocol activities on +is part of the isdn4bsd package and is used to provide the user with a +detailed mnemonic display of the layers 1, 2 and 3 protocol activities on the D channel and hex dump of the B channel(s) activities. .Pp Together with two passive supported cards and an easy to build cable it can @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ switch B channel tracing on (default off). .It Fl d switch D channel tracing off (default on). .It Fl f -Use +Use .Ar filename as the name of a file into which to write tracing output (default filename is isdndecode<n> where n is the number of the unit to decode). @@ -95,18 +95,18 @@ switch displaying of Layer 2 (Q.921) frames off (default on). .It Fl o switch off writing decode output to a file (default on). .It Fl p -Use +Use .Ar filename as the name of a file used for the -B and -P options (default filename is isdntracebin<n> where n is the number of the unit to decode). .It Fl u -Use +Use .Ar number as the unit number of the controller card to decode (default 0). .It Fl x Decode Layer 3 packets with an unknown protocol discriminator. .It Fl B -Write undecoded binary decode data to a file for later or remote +Write undecoded binary decode data to a file for later or remote analyzing (default off). .It Fl P Read undecoded binary decode data from file instead from device (default off). @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ isdndecode -f /var/tmp/isdn.decode .Ed .Pp will start D channel tracing on passive controller 0 with all except B -channel tracing enabled and logs everything into the output file +channel tracing enabled and logs everything into the output file /var/tmp/isdn.decode. .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr isdnd 8 @@ -168,5 +168,5 @@ ITU Recommendation X.208, X.209 .Sh AUTHORS The .Nm -utility and this manual page were written by +utility and this manual page were written by .An Hellmuth Michaelis Aq hm@kts.org . diff --git a/usr.sbin/i4b/isdnmonitor/isdnmonitor.8 b/usr.sbin/i4b/isdnmonitor/isdnmonitor.8 index 0cc0a3c..0bbb161 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/i4b/isdnmonitor/isdnmonitor.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/i4b/isdnmonitor/isdnmonitor.8 @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ and .Nm . .It Fl h is used to specify a hostname or a dotted-quad IP address of a machine -where an +where an .Xr isdnd 8 is running which should be monitored. .It Fl p @@ -165,9 +165,9 @@ Still one (or) more left. .An -nosplit The .Nm -utility was written by +utility was written by .An Martin Husemann -and +and .An Hellmuth Michaelis Aq hm@kts.org . -This manual page was written by +This manual page was written by .An Hellmuth Michaelis . diff --git a/usr.sbin/i4b/isdnphone/isdnphone.8 b/usr.sbin/i4b/isdnphone/isdnphone.8 index 518a9d6..72addf9 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/i4b/isdnphone/isdnphone.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/i4b/isdnphone/isdnphone.8 @@ -70,5 +70,5 @@ dials calls the number 1234 to establish a call on /dev/i4btel0 .Sh AUTHORS The .Nm -utility and this manpage were written by +utility and this manpage were written by .An Hellmuth Michaelis Aq hm@kts.org . diff --git a/usr.sbin/i4b/isdntel/isdntel.8 b/usr.sbin/i4b/isdntel/isdntel.8 index 6c66a4b..eef8450 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/i4b/isdntel/isdntel.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/i4b/isdntel/isdntel.8 @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" last edit-date: [Mon Dec 13 23:05:59 1999] -.\" +.\" .\" $FreeBSD$ .\" .\" $Id: isdntel.8,v 1.9 1999/12/13 22:11:55 hm Exp $ @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ telephone voice messages. The following options are supported: .Bl -tag -width Ds .It Fl a -Use +Use .Ar aliasfile as the pathname for an aliasfile containing aliases for phone numbers. The default path is @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ are introduced by a leading blank, tab or "#" character. Use .Ar spooldir as the directory where the incoming voice messages are stored by the -"answ" script called by +"answ" script called by .Xr isdnd 8 . This defaults to the directory .Em /var/isdn . @@ -92,5 +92,5 @@ Still two or more left. .Sh AUTHORS The .Nm -utility and this manual page were written by +utility and this manual page were written by .An Hellmuth Michaelis Aq hm@kts.org . diff --git a/usr.sbin/i4b/isdntelctl/isdntelctl.8 b/usr.sbin/i4b/isdntelctl/isdntelctl.8 index 5fdeb28..7e5ac24 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/i4b/isdntelctl/isdntelctl.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/i4b/isdntelctl/isdntelctl.8 @@ -88,9 +88,9 @@ displays the currently used sound format for device /dev/i4btel0. .Xr g711conv 1 , .Xr i4btel 4 , .Xr isdnd.rc 5 , -.Xr isdnd 8 +.Xr isdnd 8 .Sh AUTHORS The .Nm -utility and this manpage were written by +utility and this manpage were written by .An Hellmuth Michaelis Aq hm@kts.org . diff --git a/usr.sbin/i4b/isdntest/isdntest.8 b/usr.sbin/i4b/isdntest/isdntest.8 index 3de153c..e81bb8a 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/i4b/isdntest/isdntest.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/i4b/isdntest/isdntest.8 @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ is part of the isdn4bsd package and may be used as a stimulation tool for debugging the isdn4bsd kernel functionality. .Pp -NOTE: +NOTE: .Nm Isdntest must be run .Em instead @@ -80,15 +80,15 @@ utility is currently of not much use for end users, it is primarily a debugging tool for development and is part of the release in the hope, that someone enhances it as a real self test and setup-verification tool! .Pp -.Nm Isdntest +.Nm Isdntest does almost no error checking and error recovery, so unexpected hangs or crashes may occur. .Sh EXAMPLES -For the following example, it is assumed that a machine with isdn4bsd +For the following example, it is assumed that a machine with isdn4bsd installed is connected to an S0 bus and that one of the valid MSN's (MSN = Multiple Subscriber Number = telephone number) on this bus is .Em 42 . -The +The .Xr isdnd 8 .Em must not currently running on that machine! Executing: @@ -107,5 +107,5 @@ has to be finished by the user by entering Control-C. .Sh AUTHORS The .Nm -utility and this manpage were written by +utility and this manpage were written by .An Hellmuth Michaelis Aq hm@kts.org . diff --git a/usr.sbin/i4b/isdntrace/isdntrace.8 b/usr.sbin/i4b/isdntrace/isdntrace.8 index 2b651ee..4017dd1 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/i4b/isdntrace/isdntrace.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/i4b/isdntrace/isdntrace.8 @@ -56,8 +56,8 @@ .Op Fl T Ar unit .Sh DESCRIPTION .Nm -is part of the isdn4bsd package and is used to provide the user with a -mnemonic display of the layers 1, 2 and 3 protocol activities on +is part of the isdn4bsd package and is used to provide the user with a +mnemonic display of the layers 1, 2 and 3 protocol activities on the D channel and hex dump of the B channel(s) activities. .Pp Together with two passive supported cards and an easy to build cable it can @@ -70,10 +70,10 @@ utility is only available for passive supported cards. .Pp .Em Note .Pp -All filenames, user specified or default, get a date and time stamp string +All filenames, user specified or default, get a date and time stamp string added in the form -yyyymmdd-hhmmss: a hyphen, four digits year, two digits -month and day, a hyphen and two digits hour, minutes and seconds. -Tracefiles no longer get overwritten. +month and day, a hyphen and two digits hour, minutes and seconds. +Tracefiles no longer get overwritten. In case a new filename is needed within a second, the filename-generating mechanism sleeps one second. .Pp @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ switch B channel tracing on (default off). .It Fl d switch D channel tracing off (default on). .It Fl f -Use +Use .Ar filename as the name of a file into which to write tracing output (default filename is isdntrace<n> where n is the number of the unit to trace). @@ -108,12 +108,12 @@ print layer 1 (I.430) INFO signals to monitor layer 1 activity (default off). .It Fl l switch displaying of Layer 2 (Q.921) frames off (default on). .It Fl n -This option takes a numeric argument specifying the minimum +This option takes a numeric argument specifying the minimum frame size in octetts a frame must have to be displayed. (default 0) .It Fl o switch off writing trace output to a file (default on). .It Fl p -Use +Use .Ar filename as the name of a file used for the -B and -P options (default filename is isdntracebin<n> where n is the number of the unit to trace). @@ -121,14 +121,14 @@ is isdntracebin<n> where n is the number of the unit to trace). Switch off printing a raw hexadecimal dump of the packets preceding the decoded protocol information (default on). .It Fl u -Use +Use .Ar number as the unit number of the controller card to trace (default 0). .It Fl x Switch on printing of packets with a non-Q.931 protocol discriminator. (default off). .It Fl B -Write undecoded binary trace data to a file for later or remote +Write undecoded binary trace data to a file for later or remote analyzing (default off). .It Fl F This option can only be used when option -P (playback from binary data file) @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ isdntrace -f /var/tmp/isdn.trace .Ed .Pp will start D channel tracing on passive controller 0 with all except B -channel tracing enabled and logs everything into the output file +channel tracing enabled and logs everything into the output file /var/tmp/isdn.trace-yyyymmdd-hhmmss (where yyyymmdd and hhmmss are replaced by the current date and time values). .Sh SEE ALSO @@ -210,10 +210,10 @@ ITU Recommendation X.208, X.209 .An -nosplit The .Nm -utility was written by +utility was written by .An Gary Jennejohn Aq gj@FreeBSD.org -and +and .An Hellmuth Michaelis Aq hm@FreeBSD.org . .Pp -This manual page was written by +This manual page was written by .An Hellmuth Michaelis . diff --git a/usr.sbin/i4b/ispppcontrol/ispppcontrol.8 b/usr.sbin/i4b/ispppcontrol/ispppcontrol.8 index f3cdc36..5eb939f 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/i4b/ispppcontrol/ispppcontrol.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/i4b/ispppcontrol/ispppcontrol.8 @@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ by the previous example. .Sh HISTORY The .Nm -utility is based on the +utility is based on the .Xr spppcontrol 8 utility which appeared in .Fx 3.0 . diff --git a/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4b.4 b/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4b.4 index df7c28c..78b95ff 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4b.4 +++ b/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4b.4 @@ -106,5 +106,5 @@ Charging information from the kernel. .Sh AUTHORS The .Nm -device driver and this manpage were written by +device driver and this manpage were written by .An Hellmuth Michaelis Aq hm@kts.org . diff --git a/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4bctl.4 b/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4bctl.4 index bfc5a08..77983fe 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4bctl.4 +++ b/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4bctl.4 @@ -49,5 +49,5 @@ of the isdn4bsd package kernel ISDN handling layers. .Sh AUTHORS The .Nm -device driver and this manpage were written by +device driver and this manpage were written by .An Hellmuth Michaelis Aq hm@kts.org . diff --git a/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4bing.4 b/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4bing.4 index 96f92bbe..8fb0c21 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4bing.4 +++ b/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4bing.4 @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ .Sh DESCRIPTION The .Nm -driver interfaces the FreeBSD NetGraph subsystem with the +driver interfaces the FreeBSD NetGraph subsystem with the isdn4bsd package. .Pp The driver just packs packets received from the NetGraph subsystem without @@ -63,5 +63,5 @@ daemon to establish a connection. .Sh AUTHORS The .Nm -device driver and this manpage were written by +device driver and this manpage were written by .An Hellmuth Michaelis Aq hm@kts.org . diff --git a/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4bipr.4 b/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4bipr.4 index e3fa3dd..25d0163 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4bipr.4 +++ b/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4bipr.4 @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ none .Sh DESCRIPTION The .Nm -driver interfaces the IP subsystem of the operating system with the +driver interfaces the IP subsystem of the operating system with the isdn4bsd package so that transport of IP packets over an ISDN link is possible. .Pp @@ -67,19 +67,19 @@ with the .Nm ipr interfaces. .Pp -The driver optionally (when compiled with the IPR_VJ option) provides Van +The driver optionally (when compiled with the IPR_VJ option) provides Van Jacobsen header compression, under control of the link0 and link1 options to .Xr ifconfig 8 : -.Pp +.Pp .Bl -tag -width 15n -offset indent -compact .It link0 Apply VJ compression to outgoing packets on this interface, and assume that incoming packets require decompression. .It link1 Check incoming packets for Van Jacobsen compression; if they appear to be -compressed, automatically set link0. -.El +compressed, automatically set link0. +.El .Pp The default values are .Em on @@ -97,5 +97,5 @@ for .Sh AUTHORS The .Nm -device driver and this manpage were written by +device driver and this manpage were written by .An Hellmuth Michaelis Aq hm@kts.org . diff --git a/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4bisppp.4 b/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4bisppp.4 index c85282c..aea1b67 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4bisppp.4 +++ b/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4bisppp.4 @@ -41,20 +41,20 @@ none .Sh DESCRIPTION The .Nm -driver interfaces the IP subsystem of the operating system with the +driver interfaces the IP subsystem of the operating system with the isdn4bsd package so that a transport of IP packets over an ISDN link is possible. .Pp -The driver is just a glue layer between Serge Vakulenko's sppp +The driver is just a glue layer between Serge Vakulenko's sppp backend and the ISDN4BSD package. .Pp Beginning with i4b version 0.95 (and only for .Fx ) , -the sppp +the sppp subsystem was integrated into the .Nm driver to support more i4b/ISDN specific options. As a consequence it is no -longer necessary to add a "options sppp" to your kernel +longer necessary to add a "options sppp" to your kernel .Xr config 8 file. For configuration of the i4bsppp driver, either the .Xr ispppcontrol 8 @@ -77,14 +77,14 @@ with the .Nm isp interfaces. .Pp -The +The .Xr ispppcontrol 8 utility is used to configure all aspects of PPP required to connect to a remote site. .Sh LINK0 and LINK1 The .Em link0 -and +and .Em link1 flags given as parameters to .Xr ifconfig 8 @@ -93,17 +93,17 @@ have the following meaning for the devices: .Bl -tag -width link0 -compact .Pp -.It Li link0 +.It Li link0 wait passively for connection .Pp .It Li link1 auto-dial on output .El .Pp -The -.Em link0 -and -.Em link1 +The +.Em link0 +and +.Em link1 flags are set to .Em off by default. @@ -122,10 +122,10 @@ for a more detailed discussion of the flags, .An -nosplit The .Nm -device driver was written by +device driver was written by .An Joerg Wunsch Aq joerg@FreeBSD.org -and then added to ISDN4BSD by +and then added to ISDN4BSD by .An Gary Jennejohn Aq gj@FreeBSD.org . .Pp -This manpage was written by +This manpage was written by .An Hellmuth Michaelis Aq hm@kts.org . diff --git a/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4bq921.4 b/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4bq921.4 index 96805a9..1c499a9 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4bq921.4 +++ b/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4bq921.4 @@ -48,5 +48,5 @@ ITU Recommendation Q.920 and Q.921 .Sh AUTHORS The .Nm -driver and this manpage were written by +driver and this manpage were written by .An Hellmuth Michaelis Aq hm@kts.org . diff --git a/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4bq931.4 b/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4bq931.4 index 11f8c2d..49c12ec 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4bq931.4 +++ b/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4bq931.4 @@ -48,5 +48,5 @@ ITU Recommendation Q.930 and Q.931 .Sh AUTHORS The .Nm -driver and this manpage were written by +driver and this manpage were written by .An Hellmuth Michaelis Aq hm@kts.org . diff --git a/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4brbch.4 b/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4brbch.4 index 3ca55a2..90d5138 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4brbch.4 +++ b/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4brbch.4 @@ -49,5 +49,5 @@ part of the isdn4bsd package. .Sh AUTHORS The .Nm -device driver and this manpage were written by +device driver and this manpage were written by .An Hellmuth Michaelis Aq hm@kts.org . diff --git a/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4btel.4 b/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4btel.4 index d47a42d..b1075e9 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4btel.4 +++ b/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4btel.4 @@ -55,12 +55,12 @@ Functionality one is used to enable commands to dial out and hang up and receive responses about the state of the dial out progress and status. This commands may change in the future, for details see the file .Em i4b_tel_ioctl.h -and the +and the .Xr isdnphone 1 utility. .Pp The telephony data stream comes out of the line in a bit-reversed format, -so the +so the .Nm driver does the bit-reversion process in any case. .Pp @@ -85,38 +85,38 @@ parameters are available: .Pp .Bl -tag -width Ds -compact -offset indent .It Ar CVT_NONE -do no A-law/u-law audio format conversion. The conversion path looks like -this: +do no A-law/u-law audio format conversion. The conversion path looks like +this: .Pp USER <--> bitreversing <--> ISDN-line .Pp .It Ar CVT_ALAW2ULAW -set set audio format conversion to do an audio conversion from A-law -(on the ISDN line) to u-law (in the userland). -The +set set audio format conversion to do an audio conversion from A-law +(on the ISDN line) to u-law (in the userland). +The .Xr read 2 -conversion path looks like this: +conversion path looks like this: .Pp USER <-- u-law/A-law <-- bitreversing <-- ISDN-line .Pp -and the +and the .Xr write 2 -conversion path looks like this: +conversion path looks like this: .Pp USER --> u-law/A-law --> bitreversing --> ISDN-line .Pp .It Ar CVT_ULAW2ALAW -set set audio format conversion to do an audio conversion from u-law +set set audio format conversion to do an audio conversion from u-law (on the ISDN line) to A-law (in the userland). -The +The .Xr read 2 -conversion path looks like this: +conversion path looks like this: .Pp USER <-- A-law/u-law <-- bitreversing <-- ISDN-line .Pp -and the +and the .Xr write 2 -conversion path looks like this: +conversion path looks like this: .Pp USER --> A-law/u-law --> bitreversing --> ISDN-line .Pp @@ -132,5 +132,5 @@ A-Law and u-Law are specified in ITU Recommendation G.711. .Sh AUTHORS The .Nm -device driver and this manpage were written by +device driver and this manpage were written by .An Hellmuth Michaelis Aq hm@kts.org . diff --git a/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4btrc.4 b/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4btrc.4 index d7e168e..a97b8c6 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4btrc.4 +++ b/usr.sbin/i4b/man/i4btrc.4 @@ -51,5 +51,5 @@ utility. .Sh AUTHORS The .Nm -device driver and this manpage were written by +device driver and this manpage were written by .An Hellmuth Michaelis Aq hm@kts.org . diff --git a/usr.sbin/i4b/man/ifpi.4 b/usr.sbin/i4b/man/ifpi.4 index 52358da..4003231 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/i4b/man/ifpi.4 +++ b/usr.sbin/i4b/man/ifpi.4 @@ -60,5 +60,5 @@ The driver was written by .An Gary Jennejohn Aq gj@FreeBSD.org . .Pp -This manpage was written by +This manpage was written by .An Hellmuth Michaelis Aq hm@kts.org . diff --git a/usr.sbin/i4b/man/ifpnp.4 b/usr.sbin/i4b/man/ifpnp.4 index ef965c3..647c154 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/i4b/man/ifpnp.4 +++ b/usr.sbin/i4b/man/ifpnp.4 @@ -43,8 +43,8 @@ The driver provides D-channel layer 1 supports as specified in ITU Recommendation I.430 and layer 1 support for the B-channel. .Pp -The driver supports passive ISA PnP ISDN cards from AVM, based on the -proprietary B-channel controller and ISA PnP interface chip from +The driver supports passive ISA PnP ISDN cards from AVM, based on the +proprietary B-channel controller and ISA PnP interface chip from AVM, Berlin, Germany. .Sh CAVEATS The driver is still in a somewhat experimental state. @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ The driver was written by .An Udo Schweigert Aq ust@cert.siemens.de . .Pp -This manpage was written by +This manpage was written by .An Hellmuth Michaelis Aq hm@kts.org and .An Udo Schweigert . diff --git a/usr.sbin/i4b/man/ihfc.4 b/usr.sbin/i4b/man/ihfc.4 index 83a47c2..5135102 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/i4b/man/ihfc.4 +++ b/usr.sbin/i4b/man/ihfc.4 @@ -78,5 +78,5 @@ The driver was written by .An Hans Petter Selasky Aq hselasky@c2i.net . .Pp -This manpage was written by +This manpage was written by .An Hellmuth Michaelis Aq hm@FreeBSD.org . diff --git a/usr.sbin/i4b/man/isic.4 b/usr.sbin/i4b/man/isic.4 index 1bd462f..c75b575 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/i4b/man/isic.4 +++ b/usr.sbin/i4b/man/isic.4 @@ -176,9 +176,9 @@ The driver provides D-channel layer 1 supports as specified in ITU Recommendation I.430 and layer 1 support for the B-channel. .Pp -The driver supports several 8 and 16bit passive ISDN cards from various +The driver supports several 8 and 16bit passive ISDN cards from various manufacturers which are all based upon the popular Siemens ISDN chipset -consisting of the ISDN Subscriber Access Controller ISAC (such as the +consisting of the ISDN Subscriber Access Controller ISAC (such as the PEB2085 or PSB 2186) and the High-Level Serial Communications Controller Extended HSCX (such as the SAB82525 or PSB21525). The newer IPAC chip (which integrates an ISAC and a HSCX in one chip, with the added benefit @@ -195,9 +195,9 @@ Notice that this cards must not have a .Em port value in the config line. .Pp -Valid interrupts are 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7. +Valid interrupts are 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7. .Pp -The i/o ports are memory mapped and the memory start address may +The i/o ports are memory mapped and the memory start address may be in the range 0xA0000 to 0xDF000 and uses 4kB of memory. .Pp .It Ar Teles S0/16, Creatix ISDN-S0, Dr. Neuhaus Niccy 1016 @@ -210,14 +210,14 @@ These boards have a jumper which specifies an i/o base address of either 0xd80, 0xe80 or 0xf80. The remaining necessary configuration values are then programmed at run time by accessing this i/o port. .Pp -Valid interrupts are 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 11, 12 or 15. +Valid interrupts are 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 11, 12 or 15. .Pp Valid memory start addresses are 0xC0000, 0xC2000, 0xC4000, 0xC6000, 0xC8000, 0xCA000, 0xCC000, 0xCE000, 0xD0000, 0xD2000, 0xD4000, 0xD6000, 0xD8000, 0xDA000, 0xDC000 and 0xDE000. .Pp -Notice: Although the Jumpers are labeled 0xd80, 0xe80 or 0xf80, they +Notice: Although the Jumpers are labeled 0xd80, 0xe80 or 0xf80, they also require i/o space at addresses 0x180, 0x280 or 0x380. .Pp .It Ar Teles S0/16.3 @@ -242,9 +242,9 @@ The required (optional under NetBSD) value is 4. .Pp These boards have a jumper which specifies an i/o base address of either -0x200, 0x240, 0x300 or 0x340. +0x200, 0x240, 0x300 or 0x340. .Pp -Valid interrupt configurations are 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 10, 11, 12 or 15. +Valid interrupt configurations are 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 10, 11, 12 or 15. .Pp Older Versions of the AVM A1 also require setting of an IRQ jumper, newer versions of this and the Fritz!Card only have an i/o base jumper and the @@ -334,7 +334,7 @@ The card addresses are auto-configured by the Zorro bus kernel subsystem. The ISDN functions of the boards are at known (to the driver) relative addresses. .Pp -Note that currently, you have to jumper the card interupt for +Note that currently, you have to jumper the card interupt for .Em IPL 2 instead of IPL 6 (which is used by most AmigaOS software). .Pp @@ -361,17 +361,17 @@ CCITT Recommendation I.430 .An -nosplit The .Nm -driver and this manpage were written by +driver and this manpage were written by .An Hellmuth Michaelis Aq hm@kts.org . -It is based on earlier work of +It is based on earlier work of .An Arne Helme , .An Andrew Gordon -and +and .An Gary Jennejohn . .Pp The complete porting to and maintenance of .Nx -was done by +was done by .An Martin Husemann Aq martin@rumolt.teuto.de . .Pp The NetBSD/Amiga ISDN Blaster/Master/MasterII driver was written by diff --git a/usr.sbin/i4b/man/itjc.4 b/usr.sbin/i4b/man/itjc.4 index 63b282a..8469fe9 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/i4b/man/itjc.4 +++ b/usr.sbin/i4b/man/itjc.4 @@ -62,5 +62,5 @@ The driver was written by .An Sergio de Souza Prallon Aq prallon@tmp.com.br . .Pp -This manpage was written by +This manpage was written by .An Hellmuth Michaelis Aq hm@FreeBSD.org . diff --git a/usr.sbin/i4b/man/iwic.4 b/usr.sbin/i4b/man/iwic.4 index 35452c4..4eac928 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/i4b/man/iwic.4 +++ b/usr.sbin/i4b/man/iwic.4 @@ -66,5 +66,5 @@ The driver was written by .An Dave Boyce Aq dave@abyss.demon.co.uk . .Pp -This manpage was written by +This manpage was written by .An Hellmuth Michaelis Aq hm@kts.org . diff --git a/usr.sbin/inetd/inetd.8 b/usr.sbin/inetd/inetd.8 index 045dd7f..77836bf 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/inetd/inetd.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/inetd/inetd.8 @@ -175,22 +175,22 @@ server program server program arguments .Ed .Pp -There are two types of services that +There are two types of services that .Nm can start: standard and TCPMUX. A standard service has a well-known port assigned to it; it may be a service that implements an official Internet standard or is a BSD-specific service. -As described in +As described in .Tn RFC 1078 , -TCPMUX services are nonstandard services that do not have a +TCPMUX services are nonstandard services that do not have a well-known port assigned to them. They are invoked from .Nm when a program connects to the .Dq tcpmux well-known port and specifies -the service name. +the service name. This feature is useful for adding locally-developed servers. TCPMUX requests are only accepted when the multiplexor service itself is enabled, above and beyond and specific TCPMUX-based servers; see the @@ -215,23 +215,23 @@ When used to specify an .Tn "ONC RPC" Ns -based service, this field is a valid RPC service name in the file -.Pa /etc/rpc . -The part on the right of the +.Pa /etc/rpc . +The part on the right of the .Dq / is the RPC version number. This can simply be a single numeric argument or a range of versions. -A range is bounded by the low version to the high version - +A range is bounded by the low version to the high version - .Dq rusers/1-3 . For TCPMUX services, the value of the .Em service-name field consists of the string .Dq tcpmux followed by a slash and the -locally-chosen service name. -The service names listed in +locally-chosen service name. +The service names listed in .Pa /etc/services -and the name +and the name .Dq help are reserved. Try to choose unique names for your TCPMUX services by prefixing them with @@ -248,7 +248,7 @@ or .Dq seqpacket , depending on whether the socket is a stream, datagram, raw, reliably delivered message, or sequenced packet socket. -TCPMUX services must use +TCPMUX services must use .Dq stream . .Pp The @@ -295,12 +295,12 @@ via a wildcard socket. Rpc based services (for which only IPv4 is supported at this time) -are specified with the +are specified with the .Dq rpc/tcp -or -.Dq rpc/udp +or +.Dq rpc/udp service type. -TCPMUX services must use +TCPMUX services must use .Dq tcp , .Dq tcp4 , .Dq tcp6 @@ -362,7 +362,7 @@ are started with the listening service socket, and must accept at least one connection request before exiting. Such a server would normally accept and process incoming connection requests until a timeout. -TCPMUX services must use +TCPMUX services must use .Dq nowait . .Pp The maximum number of outstanding child processes (or @@ -491,7 +491,7 @@ If the file .Pa .fakeid exists in the home directory of the identified user, report the username found in that file instead of the real username. -If the username found in +If the username found in .Pa .fakeid is that of an existing user, then the real username is reported. @@ -501,7 +501,7 @@ flag is also given then the username in .Pa .fakeid is checked against existing user IDs instead. .It Fl F -same as +same as .Fl f but without the restriction that the username in .Pa .fakeid @@ -593,7 +593,7 @@ will wrap all services specified as .Dq stream nowait or .Dq dgram -except for +except for .Dq internal services. If the @@ -641,7 +641,7 @@ should be used as the daemon name for .Dq internal services. .Ss TCPMUX -.Tn RFC 1078 +.Tn RFC 1078 describes the TCPMUX protocol: ``A TCP client connects to a foreign host on TCP port 1. It sends the service name followed by a carriage-return line-feed <CRLF>. The @@ -691,7 +691,7 @@ interface and abort execution. .Ss Ux Domain Sockets In addition to running services on IP sockets, .Nm -can also manage +can also manage .Ux domain sockets. To do this you specify a @@ -832,9 +832,9 @@ reenabled automatically in 10 minutes. .Ar user : .No \&No such user .Xc -No entry for +No entry for .Ar user -exists in the +exists in the .Xr passwd 5 database. The first message @@ -854,7 +854,7 @@ service is invoked. .No can't set gid .Ar gid .Xc -The user or group ID for the entry's +The user or group ID for the entry's .Ar user field is invalid. .Pp @@ -901,5 +901,5 @@ provided by The IPsec hack was contributed by the KAME project in 1999. The .Fx -TCP Wrappers support first appeared in +TCP Wrappers support first appeared in .Fx 3.2 . diff --git a/usr.sbin/iostat/iostat.8 b/usr.sbin/iostat/iostat.8 index aa7eb5b..f3e70ea 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/iostat/iostat.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/iostat/iostat.8 @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ is also specfied to enable the display of CPU or TTY statistics. .It Fl h Put iostat in .Sq top -mode. In this mode, iostat will show devices in order from highest to +mode. In this mode, iostat will show devices in order from highest to lowest bytes per measurement cycle. .It Fl I Display total statstics for a given time period, rather than average @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ categories of devices: .Bl -tag -width indent -compact .It device type: .Bl -tag -width 9n -compact -.It da +.It da Direct Access devices .It sa Sequential Access devices @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ Passthrough devices .Pp The user must specify at least one device type, and may specify at most one device type from each category. Multiple device types in a single -device type statement must be separated by commas. +device type statement must be separated by commas. .Pp Any number of .Fl t @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ arguments are ORed together to form a matching expression against which all devices in the system are compared. Any device that fully matches any .Fl t -argument will be included in the +argument will be included in the .Nm output, up to the number of devices that can be displayed in 80 columns, or the maximum number of devices specified by the user. @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ Default memory file. .Sh EXAMPLES .Dl iostat -w 1 da0 da1 cd0 .Pp -Display statistics for the first two Direct Access devices and the first +Display statistics for the first two Direct Access devices and the first CDROM device every second ad infinitum. .Pp .Dl iostat -c 2 @@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ ad infinitum. .Pp .Dl iostat -t da,scsi,pass -t cd,scsi,pass .Pp -Display statistics once for all SCSI passthrough devices that provide access +Display statistics once for all SCSI passthrough devices that provide access to either Direct Access or CDROM devices. .Pp .Dl iostat -h -n 8 -w 1 @@ -396,8 +396,8 @@ This version of first appeared in .Fx 3.0 . .Sh BUGS -You cannot display device statistics for a non-running system, due to the -fact that the new device statistics interface is accessible only via +You cannot display device statistics for a non-running system, due to the +fact that the new device statistics interface is accessible only via .Xr sysctl 3 , which does not provide a way to access non-running systems. .Sh AUTHORS diff --git a/usr.sbin/jail/jail.8 b/usr.sbin/jail/jail.8 index c0a1cb9..23567070 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/jail/jail.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/jail/jail.8 @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ man page for further details. .Sh EXAMPLES .Ss Setting up a Jail Directory Tree This shows how to setup a jail directory tree: -.Bd -literal +.Bd -literal D=/here/is/the/jail cd /usr/src make world DESTDIR=$D @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ or signals to all processes in the jail from within the jail. Depending on the intended use of the jail, you may also want to run .Pa /etc/rc.shutdown -from within the jail. Currently there is no way to insert new processes +from within the jail. Currently there is no way to insert new processes into a jail, so you must first log into the jail before performing these actions. .Pp diff --git a/usr.sbin/kbdcontrol/kbdcontrol.1 b/usr.sbin/kbdcontrol/kbdcontrol.1 index 938f083..5ca2140 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/kbdcontrol/kbdcontrol.1 +++ b/usr.sbin/kbdcontrol/kbdcontrol.1 @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ The command is used to set various keyboard related options for the .Xr syscons 4 console driver and the keyboard drivers, -such as key map, keyboard repeat and delay rates, bell +such as key map, keyboard repeat and delay rates, bell characteristics etc. .Pp Keyboard options may be automatically configured at system boot time by @@ -55,17 +55,17 @@ The following command line options are supported: .It Fl b Xo .Ar duration . Ns Ar pitch | Ar belltype .Xc -Set the bell duration in milliseconds and pitch in hertz. -If a +Set the bell duration in milliseconds and pitch in hertz. +If a .Ar belltype -argument is specified, it may be one of +argument is specified, it may be one of .Cm normal which sets sound parameters back to normal values, .Cm off which disables the bell entirely, or .Cm visual which sets the bell to visual mode, i.e. flashes the screen instead. -If +If .Ar belltype is preceded by the word .Cm quiet. , @@ -78,12 +78,12 @@ Set keyboard (250, 500, 750, 1000) and .Ar repeat -(34, 38, 42, 46, 50, 55, 59, 63, 68, 76, 84, 92, 100, 110, 118, 126, +(34, 38, 42, 46, 50, 55, 59, 63, 68, 76, 84, 92, 100, 110, 118, 126, 136, 152, 168, 184, 200, 220, 236, 252, 272, 304, 336, 368, 400, 440, 472, 504) rates, or if a .Ar speed -argument is specified, it may be one of +argument is specified, it may be one of .Cm slow (1000.504), .Cm fast @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ or .It Fl l Ar keymap_file Install keyboard map file from .Ar keymap_file . -You may load the keyboard map file from a menu-driven command, +You may load the keyboard map file from a menu-driven command, .Xr kbdmap 1 . .It Fl d Dump the current keyboard map onto stdout. @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ section). .It Fl L Ar keymap_file Load keyboard map file from .Ar keymap_file -and write the +and write the .Ft "struct keymap" compiled from it to stdout. This option is primarily intended for programmers and is probably @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ option. .El .Pp See -.Xr rc.conf 5 +.Xr rc.conf 5 for details. .Ss Driver Configuration The keyboard device driver may let you change default configuration diff --git a/usr.sbin/kbdcontrol/kbdmap.5 b/usr.sbin/kbdcontrol/kbdmap.5 index 56565a2..29d626c 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/kbdcontrol/kbdmap.5 +++ b/usr.sbin/kbdcontrol/kbdmap.5 @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ under each modifier can be: The symbol the key should produce, in single quotes. .It Ar decnum -The +The .Tn ASCII value to produce as a decimal number @@ -166,47 +166,47 @@ function key, where .Ar N is a decimal number. -.It lshift +.It lshift Act as left shift key. -.It rshift +.It rshift Act as right shift key. -.It clock +.It clock Act as caps lock key. -.It nlock +.It nlock Act as num lock key. -.It slock +.It slock Act as scroll lock key. -.It lalt|alt +.It lalt|alt Act as left alt key. -.It btab +.It btab Act as backwards tab. -.It lctrl|ctrl +.It lctrl|ctrl Act as left control key. -.It rctrl +.It rctrl Act as right control key. -.It ralt +.It ralt Act as right alt (altgr) key. -.It alock +.It alock Act as alt lock key. -.It ashift +.It ashift Act as alt shift key. -.It meta +.It meta Act as meta key. -.It lshifta|shifta +.It lshifta|shifta Act as left shift key / alt lock. -.It rshifta +.It rshifta Act as right shift key / alt lock. -.It lctrla|ctrla +.It lctrla|ctrla Act as left ctrl key / alt lock. -.It rctrla +.It rctrla Act as right ctrl key / alt lock. -.It lalta|alta +.It lalta|alta Act as left alt key / alt lock. -.It ralta +.It ralta Act as right alt key / alt lock. -.It nscr +.It nscr Act as switch to next screen. -.It pscr +.It pscr Act as switch to previous screen. .It scr Ns Ar N Switch to screen @@ -214,21 +214,21 @@ Switch to screen where .Ar N is a decimal number. -.It boot +.It boot Reboot the machine. -.It halt +.It halt Halt the machine. -.It pdwn +.It pdwn Halt the machine and attempt to power it down. -.It debug +.It debug Call the debugger. -.It susp +.It susp Use APM to suspend power. -.It saver +.It saver Activate screen saver by toggling between splash/text screen. -.It panic +.It panic Panic the system. .It paste Act as mouse buffer paste. diff --git a/usr.sbin/kbdmap/kbdmap.1 b/usr.sbin/kbdmap/kbdmap.1 index cdd5bb7..9bc8273 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/kbdmap/kbdmap.1 +++ b/usr.sbin/kbdmap/kbdmap.1 @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@ .Nd front end for syscons .Sh SYNOPSIS .Nm -.Op Fl K -.Op Fl V +.Op Fl K +.Op Fl V .Op Fl d | Fl default .Op Fl h | Fl help .Op Fl l | Fl lang Ar language @@ -41,27 +41,27 @@ .Op Fl r | Fl restore .Op Fl s | Fl show .Op Fl v | Fl verbose -.Sh DESCRIPTION +.Sh DESCRIPTION .Nm Kbdmap -allows easy setting of available keymaps. +allows easy setting of available keymaps. The -.Nm vidfont +.Nm vidfont command allows the setting of fonts. Both examine a database for the keymaps and fonts. Descriptions are in English by default, but may also be in other languages. .Pp -It is strongly recommended to not choose -.Tn MSDOS +It is strongly recommended to not choose +.Tn MSDOS codepage keymaps or fonts. -Use the -.Tn ISO -standard version if available! -.Tn X11 +Use the +.Tn ISO +standard version if available! +.Tn X11 does not -support -.Tn MSDOS +support +.Tn MSDOS codepage. .Pp The following options are available: @@ -114,10 +114,10 @@ values .El .Sh BUGS .\" .Nm kbdmap/vidfont -.\" does not know which font is in use. E.g. if the current font -.\" is iso-8859-1 and you chose lang 'ru' (for Russian) +.\" does not know which font is in use. E.g. if the current font +.\" is iso-8859-1 and you chose lang 'ru' (for Russian) .\" you get funny latin1 characters and not russkij shrift. -.\" +.\" .Nm Vidcontrol and .Nm kbdcontrol diff --git a/usr.sbin/kernbb/kernbb.8 b/usr.sbin/kernbb/kernbb.8 index de10f95..52187d5 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/kernbb/kernbb.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/kernbb/kernbb.8 @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ the default memory .Xr cc 1 .Sh AUTHORS The -.Nm +.Nm command was written by .An Poul-Henning Kamp , along with the kernel-support. diff --git a/usr.sbin/keyadmin/keyadmin.8 b/usr.sbin/keyadmin/keyadmin.8 index 4bcc3d1..4b3f374 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/keyadmin/keyadmin.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/keyadmin/keyadmin.8 @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ The .Nm command is used to manually enter security associations into the kernel -key/security association database. (See +key/security association database. (See .Xr key 4 ) . .Pp Almost any operation offered in the @@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ command first appeared in NRL's IPv6 networking distribution. .Nm Keyadmin started its life as a pipe dream thought up by Dan McDonald, and came to -life through the excruciating efforts of Ran Atkinson, Dan McDonald, +life through the excruciating efforts of Ran Atkinson, Dan McDonald, Craig Metz, and Bao Phan. The NRL version of the program was originally called .Nm key , diff --git a/usr.sbin/keyserv/keyserv.8 b/usr.sbin/keyserv/keyserv.8 index ff9e933..b54e5e4 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/keyserv/keyserv.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/keyserv/keyserv.8 @@ -29,12 +29,12 @@ Normally, root's key is read from the file .Pa /etc/.rootkey when the daemon is started. This is useful during power-fail reboots -when no one is around to type a password. +when no one is around to type a password. .Pp -If a client with no secret key calls +If a client with no secret key calls .Nm , -then the key of user -.Em nobody +then the key of user +.Em nobody is used instead as the default key. .Pp The following options are available: @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ The following options are available: Disable the use of default keys for .Em nobody . .It Fl D -Run in debugging mode and log all requests to +Run in debugging mode and log all requests to .Nm . .It Fl n Root's secret key is not read from diff --git a/usr.sbin/kgmon/kgmon.8 b/usr.sbin/kgmon/kgmon.8 index 0a8fdd4..f1d21ff 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/kgmon/kgmon.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/kgmon/kgmon.8 @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Dump the contents of the profile buffers into a .Pa gmon.out file. .It Fl r -Reset all the profile buffers. +Reset all the profile buffers. If the .Fl p flag is also specified, the @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ default .Pa /kernel . .El .Pp -If neither +If neither .Fl B nor .Fl b @@ -120,8 +120,8 @@ the default memory Users with only read permission on .Pa /dev/kmem cannot change the state -of profiling collection. -They can get a +of profiling collection. +They can get a .Pa gmon.out file with the warning that the data may be inconsistent if profiling is in progress. diff --git a/usr.sbin/lpr/chkprintcap/chkprintcap.8 b/usr.sbin/lpr/chkprintcap/chkprintcap.8 index 742294f..e036ab0 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/lpr/chkprintcap/chkprintcap.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/lpr/chkprintcap/chkprintcap.8 @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ .\" no representations about the suitability of this software for any .\" purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied .\" warranty. -.\" +.\" .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY M.I.T. ``AS IS''. M.I.T. DISCLAIMS .\" ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, .\" INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF diff --git a/usr.sbin/lpr/lpd/lpd.8 b/usr.sbin/lpr/lpd/lpd.8 index cfd97bf..b2b6af5 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/lpr/lpd/lpd.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/lpr/lpd/lpd.8 @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ The daemon begins processing files after it has successfully set the lock for exclusive access (described a bit later), and scans the spool directory -for files beginning with +for files beginning with .Em cf . Lines in each .Em cf @@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ Indent. The number of characters to indent the output by (in ASCII). Unlink. Name of file to remove upon completion of printing. .It N File name. The name of the file which is being printed, or a blank -for the standard input (when +for the standard input (when .Xr lpr is invoked in a pipeline). .It Z diff --git a/usr.sbin/lpr/lpr/printcap.5 b/usr.sbin/lpr/lpr/printcap.5 index 7fd6421..44c8d55 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/lpr/lpr/printcap.5 +++ b/usr.sbin/lpr/lpr/printcap.5 @@ -52,11 +52,11 @@ used to describe line printers. The spooling system accesses the file every time it is used, allowing dynamic addition and deletion of printers. Each entry in the data base is used to describe one printer. This data base may not be -substituted for, as is possible for +substituted for, as is possible for .Xr termcap 5 , because it may allow accounting to be bypassed. .Pp -The default printer is normally +The default printer is normally .Em lp , though the environment variable .Ev PRINTER @@ -293,14 +293,14 @@ may log either to or using .Xr syslog 3 , and must not ignore -.Dv SIGINT . +.Dv SIGINT . .Sh REMOTE PRINTING When printing to a remote printer using .Cm rm , it is possible to use either .Cm if or -.Cm of . +.Cm of . If both are specified, .Cm of is ignored. Both filters behave the same except that they are passed diff --git a/usr.sbin/lpr/lprm/lprm.1 b/usr.sbin/lpr/lprm/lprm.1 index 2b29208..38f059d 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/lpr/lprm/lprm.1 +++ b/usr.sbin/lpr/lprm/lprm.1 @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ exists, and a printer has not been specified with the .Fl P option, -the default printer is assumed from +the default printer is assumed from .Ev PRINTER . .El .Sh FILES diff --git a/usr.sbin/lptcontrol/lptcontrol.8 b/usr.sbin/lptcontrol/lptcontrol.8 index 783bea5..ec165cc 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/lptcontrol/lptcontrol.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/lptcontrol/lptcontrol.8 @@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ The .Nm command is used to set either the interrupt-driven, extended or polling mode -of individual +of individual .Xr lpt 4 devices. When a printer is switched from @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ For an ECP/ISA parallel port, it may be FIFO+DMA or ECP. .Pp The following command line options are supported: -.Bl -tag -width indent +.Bl -tag -width indent .It Fl i Turn on interrupt-driven mode. .It Fl p @@ -49,13 +49,13 @@ Turn on standard mode, i.e. turn off extended mode. .It Fl d Ar device Set the mode of the printer device specified by .Ar device . -The default value for +The default value for .Ar device is .Pa /dev/lpt0 . .El .Pp -One of +One of .Fl i , p or .Fl e @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ kernel configuration file .Sh BUGS Sure to be some. .Sh SEE ALSO -.Xr lpt 4 +.Xr lpt 4 .Sh AUTHORS .An Geoffrey M. Rehmet .Sh HISTORY diff --git a/usr.sbin/mailwrapper/mailwrapper.8 b/usr.sbin/mailwrapper/mailwrapper.8 index bd03b2c..7f45e28 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/mailwrapper/mailwrapper.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/mailwrapper/mailwrapper.8 @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ is or .Dq newaliases and behaves appropriately. -Typically, replacement MTAs provide similar +Typically, replacement MTAs provide similar functionality, either through a program that also switches behavior based on calling name, or through a set of programs that provide similar functionality. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ This leads to configuration problems for many administrators, since they may wish to install a new MTA without altering the system provided .Pa /usr . -(This may be, for example, to avoid having upgrade problems when a new +(This may be, for example, to avoid having upgrade problems when a new version of the system is installed over the old.) They may also have a shared .Pa /usr @@ -111,19 +111,19 @@ and to invoke an appropriate MTA instead of based on configuration information placed in .Pa /etc/mail/mailer.conf . This permits the administrator to configure which MTA is to be invoked on -the system at run time. +the system at run time. .Sh FILES Configuration for .Nm is kept in .Pa /etc/mail/mailer.conf . -.Pa /usr/sbin/sendmail +.Pa /usr/sbin/sendmail is typically set up as a symbolic link to .Nm which is not usually invoked on its own. .Sh DIAGNOSTICS .Nm -will return an error value and print a diagnostic if its configuration +will return an error value and print a diagnostic if its configuration file is missing or malformed, or does not contain a mapping for the name under which .Nm diff --git a/usr.sbin/manctl/manctl.8 b/usr.sbin/manctl/manctl.8 index 72e5307..b244d30 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/manctl/manctl.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/manctl/manctl.8 @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ .Ar path ... .Sh DESCRIPTION .Nm Manctl -compress or uncompress manual pages in directory path. +compress or uncompress manual pages in directory path. If possible, .so's are replaced with hard links. .Pp The following options are available: diff --git a/usr.sbin/memcontrol/memcontrol.8 b/usr.sbin/memcontrol/memcontrol.8 index b4a9e76..998d9cd 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/memcontrol/memcontrol.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/memcontrol/memcontrol.8 @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ .\" Copyright (c) 1999 Chris Costello .\" All rights reserved. -.\" +.\" .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions .\" are met: @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ .\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright .\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the .\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. -.\" +.\" .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND .\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE @@ -21,9 +21,9 @@ .\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY .\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF .\" SUCH DAMAGE. -.\" +.\" .\" $FreeBSD$ -.\" +.\" .Dd September 28, 1999 .Dt MEMCONTROL 8 .Os diff --git a/usr.sbin/mixer/mixer.8 b/usr.sbin/mixer/mixer.8 index 27e1b39..9c725a8 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/mixer/mixer.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/mixer/mixer.8 @@ -56,10 +56,10 @@ The command is used to set and display soundcard mixer device levels. It may also be used to start and stop recording from the soundcard. The list -of mixer devices that may be modified are: +of mixer devices that may be modified are: .Pp .Bd -ragged -offset indent -vol, bass, treble, synth, pcm, speaker, mic, cd, mix, +vol, bass, treble, synth, pcm, speaker, mic, cd, mix, pcm2, rec, igain, ogain, line1, line2, and line3. .Ed .Pp @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ the optional left and right channel settings of .Ar lvol Ns Op : Ns Ar rvol may be specified. The .Ar lvol -and +and .Ar rvol arguments may be from 0 - 100. Omitting .Ar dev diff --git a/usr.sbin/mld6query/mld6query.8 b/usr.sbin/mld6query/mld6query.8 index c29cb07..8b2f7c0 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/mld6query/mld6query.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/mld6query/mld6query.8 @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ .\" .\" Copyright (C) 1995, 1996, 1997, and 1998 WIDE Project. .\" All rights reserved. -.\" +.\" .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions .\" are met: @@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ .\" 3. Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors .\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software .\" without specific prior written permission. -.\" +.\" .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND .\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE diff --git a/usr.sbin/mlxcontrol/mlxcontrol.8 b/usr.sbin/mlxcontrol/mlxcontrol.8 index 723a780..3803fb6 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/mlxcontrol/mlxcontrol.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/mlxcontrol/mlxcontrol.8 @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ .\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. .\" 2. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products .\" derived from this software without specific prior written permission -.\" +.\" .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. @@ -112,16 +112,16 @@ use the .Ar status command to monitor the progress of the check. .It rebuild -Requires two arguments, +Requires two arguments, .Ar controller and .Ar physdrive as specified in the output of the -.Ar status +.Ar status command. All system drives using space on the physical drive -.Ar physdrive +.Ar physdrive are rebuilt, reconstructing all data on the drive. Note that each controller can only perform one rebuild at a time. This command returns immediately; use the diff --git a/usr.sbin/moused/moused.8 b/usr.sbin/moused/moused.8 index 915ba00..5b6642a 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/moused/moused.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/moused/moused.8 @@ -57,12 +57,12 @@ .Fl p Ar port .Fl i Ar info .Sh DESCRIPTION -The mouse daemon +The mouse daemon .Nm -and the console driver work together to support +and the console driver work together to support mouse operation in the text console and user programs. -They virtualize the mouse and provide user programs with mouse data -in the standard format +They virtualize the mouse and provide user programs with mouse data +in the standard format .Pq see Xr sysmouse 4 . .Pp The mouse daemon listens to the specified port for mouse data, @@ -74,14 +74,14 @@ The roller/wheel movement is reported as ``Z'' axis movement. .Pp The console driver will display the mouse pointer on the screen and provide cut and paste functions if the mouse pointer is enabled -in the virtual console via +in the virtual console via .Xr vidcontrol 1 . If .Xr sysmouse 4 -is opened by the user program, the console driver also passes the mouse +is opened by the user program, the console driver also passes the mouse data to the device so that the user program will see it. .Pp -If the mouse daemon receives the signal +If the mouse daemon receives the signal .Dv SIGHUP , it will reopen the mouse port and reinitializes itself. Useful if @@ -96,18 +96,18 @@ by pressing the left and right physical buttons simultaneously. .It Fl C Ar threshold Set double click speed as the maximum interval in msec between button clicks. Without this option, the default value of 500 msec will be assumed. -This option will have effect only on the cut and paste operations +This option will have effect only on the cut and paste operations in the text mode console. The user program which is reading mouse data -via +via .Xr sysmouse 4 will not be affected. .It Fl D -Lower DTR on the serial port. -This option is valid only if +Lower DTR on the serial port. +This option is valid only if .Ar mousesystems is selected as the protocol type. -The DTR line may need to be dropped for a 3-button mouse +The DTR line may need to be dropped for a 3-button mouse to operate in the .Ar mousesystems mode. @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ Set the report rate (reports/sec) of the device if supported. Write the process id of the .Nm daemon in the specified file. -Without this option, the process id will be stored in +Without this option, the process id will be stored in .Pa /var/run/moused.pid . .It Fl P Do not start the Plug and Play COM device enumeration procedure @@ -139,15 +139,15 @@ option, the command will not be able to print useful information for the serial mouse. .It Fl R Lower RTS on the serial port. -This option is valid only if +This option is valid only if .Ar mousesystems is selected as the protocol type by the .Fl t option below. -It is often used with the +It is often used with the .Fl D option above. -Both RTS and DTR lines may need to be dropped for +Both RTS and DTR lines may need to be dropped for a 3-button mouse to operate in the .Ar mousesystems mode. @@ -170,23 +170,23 @@ Enable debugging messages. Do not become a daemon and instead run as a foreground process. Useful for testing and debugging. .It Fl i Ar info -Print specified information and quit. Available pieces of +Print specified information and quit. Available pieces of information are: .Pp .Bl -tag -compact -width modelxxx .It Ar port -Port (device file) name, i.e. -.Pa /dev/cuaa0 , +Port (device file) name, i.e. +.Pa /dev/cuaa0 , .Pa /dev/mse0 -and +and .Pa /dev/psm0 . .It Ar if Interface type: serial, bus, inport or ps/2. .It Ar type Protocol type. -It is one of the types listed under the +It is one of the types listed under the .Fl t -option below or +option below or .Ar sysmouse if the driver supports the .Ar sysmouse @@ -205,14 +205,14 @@ If the command cannot determine the requested information, it prints ``unknown'' or ``generic''. .It Fl m Ar N=M -Assign the physical button -.Ar M -to the logical button +Assign the physical button +.Ar M +to the logical button .Ar N . You may specify as many instances of this option as you like. More than one physical button may be assigned to a logical button at the same time. -In this case the logical button will be down, +In this case the logical button will be down, if either of the assigned physical buttons is held down. Do not put space around `='. .It Fl p Ar port @@ -233,23 +233,23 @@ Not all serial mice support this option. .It Fl t Ar type Specify the protocol type of the mouse attached to the port. You may explicitly specify a type listed below, or use -.Ar auto +.Ar auto to let the .Nm command to automatically select an appropriate protocol for the given mouse. -If you entirely ommit this options in the command line, +If you entirely ommit this options in the command line, .Fl t Ar auto is assumed. Under normal circumstances, -you need to use this option only if the +you need to use this option only if the .Nm command is not able to detect the protocol automatically .Pq see the Sx Configuring Mouse Daemon . .Pp Note that if a protocol type is specified with this option, the .Fl P -option above is implied and Plug and Play COM device enumeration +option above is implied and Plug and Play COM device enumeration procedure will be disabled. .Pp Also note that if your mouse is attached to the PS/2 mouse port, you should @@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ MouseSystems 5-byte protocol. 3-button mice may use this protocol. .It Ar mmseries MM Series mouse protocol. .It Ar logitech -Logitech mouse protocol. Note that this is for old Logitech models. +Logitech mouse protocol. Note that this is for old Logitech models. .Ar mouseman or .Ar intellimouse @@ -311,8 +311,8 @@ Interlink VersaPad protocol. For the bus and InPort mouse: .Bl -tag -compact -width mousesystemsxxx .It Ar busmouse -This is the only protocol type available for -the bus and InPort mouse and should be specified for any bus mice +This is the only protocol type available for +the bus and InPort mouse and should be specified for any bus mice and InPort mice, regardless of the brand. .El .Pp @@ -333,7 +333,7 @@ Make the physical button act as the wheel mode button. While this button is pressed, X and Y axis movement is reported to be zero and the Y axis movement is mapped to Z axis. -You may further map the Z axis movement to virtual buttons by the +You may further map the Z axis movement to virtual buttons by the .Fl z option below. .It Fl z Ar target @@ -347,23 +347,23 @@ maybe: X or Y axis movement will be reported when the Z axis movement is detected. .It Ar N Report down events for the virtual buttons -.Ar N -and -.Ar N+1 -respectively when negative and positive Z axis movement +.Ar N +and +.Ar N+1 +respectively when negative and positive Z axis movement is detected. -There do not need to be physical buttons +There do not need to be physical buttons .Ar N -and +and .Ar N+1 . Note that mapping to logical buttons is carried out after mapping from the Z axis movement to the virtual buttons is done. .It Ar N1 N2 Report down events for the virtual buttons .Ar N1 -and +and .Ar N2 -respectively when negative and positive Z axis movement +respectively when negative and positive Z axis movement is detected. .It Ar N1 N2 N3 N4 This is useful for the mouse with two wheels of which @@ -386,40 +386,40 @@ Note that horizontal movement or second roller/wheel movement may not always be detected, because there appears to be no accepted standard as to how it is encoded. .Pp -Note also that some mice think left is the negative horizontal direction, -others may think otherwise. +Note also that some mice think left is the negative horizontal direction, +others may think otherwise. Moreover, there are some mice whose two wheels are both mounted vertically, and the direction of the second vertical wheel does not match the first one's. .El .El .Ss Configuring Mouse Daemon -The first thing you need to know is the interface type +The first thing you need to know is the interface type of the mouse you are going to use. It can be determined by looking at the connector of the mouse. The serial mouse has a D-Sub female 9- or 25-pin connector. -The bus and InPort mice have either a D-Sub male 9-pin connector +The bus and InPort mice have either a D-Sub male 9-pin connector or a round DIN 9-pin connector. The PS/2 mouse is equipped with a small, round DIN 6-pin connector. -Some mice come with adapters with which the connector can +Some mice come with adapters with which the connector can be converted to another. If you are to use such an adapter, -remember the connector at the very end of the mouse/adapter pair is +remember the connector at the very end of the mouse/adapter pair is what matters. The USB mouse has a flat rectangular connector. .Pp The next thing to decide is a port to use for the given interface. -For the bus, InPort and PS/2 mice, there is little choice: +For the bus, InPort and PS/2 mice, there is little choice: the bus and InPort mice always use .Pa /dev/mse0 , and the PS/2 mouse is always at .Pa /dev/psm0 . There may be more than one serial port to which the serial -mouse can be attached. Many people often assign the first, built-in +mouse can be attached. Many people often assign the first, built-in serial port .Pa /dev/cuaa0 to the mouse. You can attach multiple USB mice to your system or to your USB hub. -They are accessible as +They are accessible as .Pa /dev/ums0 , /dev/ums1 , and so on. .Pa @@ -437,22 +437,22 @@ Run the command with the .Fl i option and see what it says. If the command can identify -the protocol type, no further investigation is necessary on your part. +the protocol type, no further investigation is necessary on your part. You may start the daemon without explicitly specifying a protocol type .Pq see Sx EXAMPLES . .Pp -The command may print +The command may print .Ar sysmouse if the mouse driver supports this protocol type. .Pp Note that the .Dv type -and +and .Dv model -printed by the +printed by the .Fl i option do not necessarily match the product name of the pointing device -in question, but they may give the name of the device with which it is +in question, but they may give the name of the device with which it is compatible. .Pp If the @@ -487,9 +487,9 @@ protocol. 3-button serial mice may work with the .Ar mousesystems protocol. -If it does not, it may work with the +If it does not, it may work with the .Ar microsoft -protocol although +protocol although the third (middle) button will not function. 3-button serial mice may also work with the .Ar mouseman @@ -497,10 +497,10 @@ protocol under which the third button may function as expected. .It 3-button serial mice may have a small switch to choose between ``MS'' and ``PC'', or ``2'' and ``3''. -``MS'' or ``2'' usually mean the +``MS'' or ``2'' usually mean the .Ar microsoft protocol. -``PC'' or ``3'' will choose the +``PC'' or ``3'' will choose the .Ar mousesystems protocol. .It @@ -527,7 +527,7 @@ the command. .Ss Multiple Mice As many instances of the mouse daemon as the number of mice attached to the system may be run simultaneously; one -instance for each mouse. +instance for each mouse. This is useful if the user wants to use the built-in PS/2 pointing device of a laptop computer while on the road, but wants to use a serial mouse when s/he attaches the system to the docking station in the office. @@ -535,14 +535,14 @@ Run two mouse daemons and tell the application program .Pq such as the X Window System to use .Xr sysmouse , -then the application program will always see mouse data from either mice. +then the application program will always see mouse data from either mice. When the serial mouse is not attached, the corresponding mouse daemon will not detect any movement or button state change and the application program will only see mouse data coming from the daemon for the PS/2 mouse. In contrast when both mice are attached and both of them are moved at the same time in this configuration, -the mouse pointer will travel across the screen just as if movement of +the mouse pointer will travel across the screen just as if movement of the mice is combined all together. .Sh FILES .Bl -tag -width /dev/consolectl -compact @@ -575,7 +575,7 @@ command determine the protocol type of the mouse at the serial port If successful, the command will print the type, otherwise it will say ``unknown''. .Pp -.Dl moused -p /dev/cuaa0 +.Dl moused -p /dev/cuaa0 .Dl vidcontrol -m on .Pp If the @@ -585,10 +585,10 @@ port automatically, you can start the daemon without the .Fl t option and enable the mouse pointer in the text console as above. .Pp -.Dl moused -p /dev/mouse -t microsoft +.Dl moused -p /dev/mouse -t microsoft .Dl vidcontrol -m on .Pp -Start the mouse daemon on the serial port +Start the mouse daemon on the serial port .Pa /dev/mouse . The protocol type .Ar microsoft @@ -598,8 +598,8 @@ option. .Pp .Dl moused -p /dev/mouse -m 1=3 -m 3=1 .Pp -Assign the physical button 3 (right button) to the logical button 1 -(logical left) and the physical button 1 (left) to the logical +Assign the physical button 3 (right button) to the logical button 1 +(logical left) and the physical button 1 (left) to the logical button 3 (logical right). This will effectively swap the left and right buttons. .Pp @@ -615,8 +615,8 @@ command does not currently work with the alternative console driver .Pp Many pad devices behave as if the first (left) button were pressed if the user `taps' the surface of the pad. -In contrast, some ALPS GlidePoint and Interlink VersaPad models -treat the tapping action +In contrast, some ALPS GlidePoint and Interlink VersaPad models +treat the tapping action as fourth button events. Use the option ``-m 1=4'' for these models to obtain the same effect as the other pad devices. @@ -626,15 +626,15 @@ are three buttons on the mouse. The logical button 1 (logical left) selects a region of text in the console and copies it to the cut buffer. The logical button 3 (logical right) extends the selected region. -The logical button 2 (logical middle) pastes the selected text +The logical button 2 (logical middle) pastes the selected text at the text cursor position. -If the mouse has only two buttons, the middle, `paste' button +If the mouse has only two buttons, the middle, `paste' button is not available. To obtain the paste function, use the .Fl 3 option to emulate the middle button, or use the .Fl m -option to assign the physical right button to the logical middle button: +option to assign the physical right button to the logical middle button: ``-m 2=3''. .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr kill 1 , @@ -652,11 +652,11 @@ The command partially supports .Dq Plug and Play External COM Device Specification in order to support PnP serial mice. -However, due to various degrees of conformance to the specification by +However, due to various degrees of conformance to the specification by existing serial mice, it does not strictly follow the version 1.0 of the standard. -Even with this less strict approach, -it may not always determine an appropriate protocol type +Even with this less strict approach, +it may not always determine an appropriate protocol type for the given serial mouse. .Sh AUTHORS .An -nosplit diff --git a/usr.sbin/mrouted/map-mbone.8 b/usr.sbin/mrouted/map-mbone.8 index 502b764..5260042 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/mrouted/map-mbone.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/mrouted/map-mbone.8 @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ attempts to display all multicast routers that are reachable from the multicast .Ar starting_router . If not specified on the command line, the default multicast .Ar starting_router -is the localhost. +is the localhost. .Pp .Nm Map-mbone traverses neighboring multicast routers by sending the ASK_NEIGHBORS IGMP @@ -30,12 +30,12 @@ If this multicast router responds, the version number and a list of their neighboring multicast router addresses is part of that response. If the responding router has recent multicast version -number, then +number, then .Nm requests additional information such as metrics, thresholds, and flags from the multicast router. -For each new occurrence of neighboring multicast router in -the reply and provided the flooding option has been selected, then +For each new occurrence of neighboring multicast router in +the reply and provided the flooding option has been selected, then .Nm asks each of this multicast router for a list of neighbors. This search @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ When the debug level is greater than the default value of 0, addition debugging messages are printed. Regardless of the debug level, an error condition, will always write an error message and will -cause +cause .Nm to terminate. Non-zero debug levels have the following effects: diff --git a/usr.sbin/mrouted/mrinfo.8 b/usr.sbin/mrouted/mrinfo.8 index ba1867a..b06b4b9 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/mrouted/mrinfo.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/mrouted/mrinfo.8 @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ If this multicast router responds, the version number and a list of their neighboring multicast router addresses is part of that response. If the responding router -has a recent multicast version number, then +has a recent multicast version number, then .Nm requests additional information such as metrics, thresholds, and flags from the multicast router. @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ When the debug level is greater than the default value of 0, addition debugging messages are printed. Regardless of the debug level, an error condition, will always write an error message and will -cause +cause .Nm to terminate. Non-zero debug levels have the following effects: diff --git a/usr.sbin/mrouted/mrouted.8 b/usr.sbin/mrouted/mrouted.8 index 963f9af..94632aa 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/mrouted/mrouted.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/mrouted/mrouted.8 @@ -14,14 +14,14 @@ .Op Fl d Op Ar debug_level .Op Fl p .Sh DESCRIPTION -.Nm Mrouted +.Nm Mrouted is an implementation of the Distance-Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP), an earlier version of which is specified in RFC-1075. It maintains topological knowledge via a distance-vector routing protocol (like RIP, described in RFC-1058), upon which it implements a multicast datagram forwarding algorithm called Reverse Path Multicasting. .Pp -.Nm Mrouted +.Nm Mrouted forwards a multicast datagram along a shortest (reverse) path tree rooted at the subnet on which the datagram originates. The multicast @@ -35,42 +35,42 @@ The IP time-to-live of a multicast datagram can be used to limit the range of multicast datagrams. .Pp In order to support multicasting among subnets that are separated by (unicast) -routers that do not support IP multicasting, -.Nm +routers that do not support IP multicasting, +.Nm includes support for -"tunnels", which are virtual point-to-point links between pairs of +"tunnels", which are virtual point-to-point links between pairs of multicast routers located anywhere in an internet. IP multicast packets are encapsulated for transmission through tunnels, so that they look like normal unicast datagrams -to intervening routers and subnets. The encapsulation +to intervening routers and subnets. The encapsulation is added on entry to a tunnel, and stripped off on exit from a tunnel. The packets are encapsulated using the IP-in-IP protocol (IP protocol number 4). -Older versions of +Older versions of .Nm tunneled using IP source routing, which puts a heavy load on some types of routers. This version does not support IP source route tunnelling. .Pp -The tunnelling mechanism allows -.Nm +The tunnelling mechanism allows +.Nm to establish a virtual internet, for the purpose of multicasting only, which is independent of the physical internet, and which may span multiple Autonomous Systems. This capability is intended for experimental support of internet multicasting only, pending widespread support for multicast routing by the regular (unicast) routers. -.Nm Mrouted +.Nm Mrouted suffers from the well-known scaling problems of any distance-vector routing protocol, and does not (yet) support hierarchical multicast routing. .Pp -.Nm Mrouted +.Nm Mrouted handles multicast routing only; there may or may not be unicast routing -software running on the same machine as +software running on the same machine as .Nm . With the use of tunnels, it -is not necessary for -.Nm +is not necessary for +.Nm to have access to more than one physical subnet in order to perform multicast forwarding. .Pp @@ -83,12 +83,12 @@ Default is .It Fl d Op Ar debug_level If no .Fl d -option is given, or if the debug level is specified as 0, +option is given, or if the debug level is specified as 0, .Nm detaches from the invoking terminal. Otherwise, it remains attached to the invoking terminal and responsive to signals from that terminal. -Regardless of the debug level, -.Nm +Regardless of the debug level, +.Nm always writes warning and error messages to the system log demon. The .Fl debug-level @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ writes its pid to the file .Pa /var/run/mrouted.pid . .El .Sh CONFIGURATION -.Nm Mrouted +.Nm Mrouted automatically configures itself to forward on all multicast-capable interfaces, i.e., interfaces that have the IFF_MULTICAST flag set (excluding the loopback "interface"), and it finds other DVMRP routers directly reachable @@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ In general, all multicast routers connected to a particular subnet or tunnel should use the same metric and threshold for that subnet or tunnel. .It rate_limit Ar r -The rate_limit option allows the network administrator to specify a +The rate_limit option allows the network administrator to specify a certain bandwidth in Kbits/second which would be allocated to multicast traffic. It defaults 0 (unlimited). .It boundary Ar "boundary-name|scoped-addr/mask-len" @@ -370,7 +370,7 @@ to routes on both output and input. Without the .Ar bidir keyword, .Li accept -and +and .Li deny filters are only applied on input. Poison reverse routes are never filtered out. @@ -380,7 +380,7 @@ filtered out. will not initiate execution if it has fewer than two enabled vifs, where a vif (virtual interface) is either a physical multicast-capable interface or a tunnel. It will log a warning if all of its vifs are -tunnels; such an +tunnels; such an .Nm configuration would be better replaced by more direct tunnels (i.e. eliminate the middle man). @@ -423,7 +423,7 @@ tunnel 192.168.5.4 10.11.12.13 metric 1 threshold 32 boundary LOCAL boundary EE .Ed .Sh SIGNALS -.Nm Mrouted +.Nm Mrouted responds to the following signals: .Bl -tag -width indent .It HUP @@ -443,8 +443,8 @@ Dump the internal cache tables to .Pa /var/tmp/mrouted.cache . .It QUIT Dump the internal routing tables to stderr (only if -.Nm -was invoked with a non-zero debug level). +.Nm +was invoked with a non-zero debug level). .El .Pp For convenience in sending signals, @@ -465,13 +465,13 @@ Virtual Interface Table pkts out: 2322323 1 36.11.0.1 subnet: 36.11/16 1 1 querier - groups: 224.0.2.1 - 224.0.1.0 - 224.0.0.4 + groups: 224.0.2.1 + 224.0.1.0 + 224.0.0.4 pkts in: 345 pkts out: 3456 - 2 36.2.0.8 tunnel: 36.8.0.77 3 1 + 2 36.2.0.8 tunnel: 36.8.0.77 3 1 peers: 36.8.0.77 (3.255) boundaries: 239.0.1/24 : 239.1.2/24 @@ -493,7 +493,7 @@ Multicast Routing Table (1136 entries) In this example, there are four vifs connecting to two subnets and two tunnels. The vif 3 tunnel is not in use (no peer address). The vif 0 and vif 1 subnets have some groups present; tunnels never have any groups. This -instance of +instance of .Nm is the one responsible for sending periodic group membership queries on the vif 0 and vif 1 subnets, as indicated by the @@ -512,10 +512,10 @@ the outgoing vif is connected to a leaf of the broadcast tree rooted at the origin, and a multicast datagram from that origin will be forwarded on that outgoing vif only if there are members of the destination group on that leaf. .Pp -.Nm Mrouted +.Nm Mrouted also maintains a copy of the kernel forwarding cache table. Entries -are created and deleted by +are created and deleted by .Nm . .Pp The cache tables look like this: @@ -523,16 +523,16 @@ The cache tables look like this: .Bd -literal Multicast Routing Cache Table (147 entries) Origin Mcast-group CTmr Age Ptmr IVif Forwvifs - 13.2.116/22 224.2.127.255 3m 2m - 0 1 + 13.2.116/22 224.2.127.255 3m 2m - 0 1 >13.2.116.19 >13.2.116.196 - 138.96.48/21 224.2.127.255 5m 2m - 0 1 + 138.96.48/21 224.2.127.255 5m 2m - 0 1 >138.96.48.108 - 128.9.160/20 224.2.127.255 3m 2m - 0 1 + 128.9.160/20 224.2.127.255 3m 2m - 0 1 >128.9.160.45 - 198.106.194/24 224.2.135.190 9m 28s 9m 0P + 198.106.194/24 224.2.135.190 9m 28s 9m 0P >198.106.194.22 -.Ed +.Ed .Pp Each entry is characterized by the origin subnet number and mask and the destination multicast group. diff --git a/usr.sbin/mrouted/mtrace.8 b/usr.sbin/mrouted/mtrace.8 index bc609b1..f4d1a44 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/mrouted/mtrace.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/mrouted/mtrace.8 @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ trace query and as the default for the and the response destination. .It Fl l Loop indefinitely printing packet rate and loss statistics for the -multicast path every 10 seconds (see +multicast path every 10 seconds (see .Fl S Ar stat_int ) . .It Fl M Always request the response using multicast rather than attempting @@ -361,13 +361,13 @@ output might be: .Bd -literal oak.isi.edu 80# mtrace -l caraway.lcs.mit.edu 224.2.0.3 Mtrace from 18.26.0.170 to 128.9.160.100 via group 224.2.0.3 -Querying full reverse path... +Querying full reverse path... 0 oak.isi.edu (128.9.160.100) - -1 cub.isi.edu (128.9.160.153) DVMRP thresh^ 1 3 ms - -2 la.dart.net (140.173.128.1) DVMRP thresh^ 1 14 ms - -3 dc.dart.net (140.173.64.1) DVMRP thresh^ 1 50 ms - -4 bbn.dart.net (140.173.32.1) DVMRP thresh^ 1 63 ms - -5 mit.dart.net (140.173.48.2) DVMRP thresh^ 1 71 ms + -1 cub.isi.edu (128.9.160.153) DVMRP thresh^ 1 3 ms + -2 la.dart.net (140.173.128.1) DVMRP thresh^ 1 14 ms + -3 dc.dart.net (140.173.64.1) DVMRP thresh^ 1 50 ms + -4 bbn.dart.net (140.173.32.1) DVMRP thresh^ 1 63 ms + -5 mit.dart.net (140.173.48.2) DVMRP thresh^ 1 71 ms -6 caraway.lcs.mit.edu (18.26.0.170) Round trip time 124 ms; total ttl of 6 required. .Ed @@ -430,23 +430,23 @@ Waiting to accumulate statistics... Results after 101 seconds: 18.26.0.170 128.9.160.100 Packet 18.26.0.170 To 224.2.0.3 | __/ rtt 125 ms Rate Lost/Sent = Pct Rate v / hop 65 ms ------- --------------------- -18.26.0.144 -140.173.48.2 mit.dart.net +18.26.0.144 +140.173.48.2 mit.dart.net | ^ ttl 1 0 pps 0/2 = --% 0 pps v | hop 8 ms 0 pps 0/18 = 0% 0 pps -140.173.48.1 +140.173.48.1 140.173.32.1 bbn.dart.net | ^ ttl 2 0 pps 0/2 = --% 0 pps v | hop 12 ms 0 pps 0/18 = 0% 0 pps -140.173.32.2 -140.173.64.1 dc.dart.net +140.173.32.2 +140.173.64.1 dc.dart.net | ^ ttl 3 27 pps 0/2 = --% 0 pps v | hop 34 ms 26 pps 0/18 = 0% 0 pps -140.173.64.2 +140.173.64.2 140.173.128.1 la.dart.net | ^ ttl 4 83 pps 0/2 = --% 0 pps v | hop 11 ms 79 pps 0/18 = 0% 0 pps -140.173.128.2 +140.173.128.2 128.9.160.153 cub.isi.edu | \\__ ttl 5 83 pps ?/2 0 pps v \\ hop -8 ms 79 pps ?/18 0 pps @@ -500,8 +500,8 @@ Mtrace from 204.62.246.73 to 18.26.0.151 via group 224.2.143.24 Querying full reverse path... * switching to hop-by-hop: 0 butter.lcs.mit.edu (18.26.0.151) -1 jam.lcs.mit.edu (18.26.0.144) DVMRP thresh^ 1 33 ms Output pruned - -2 bbn.dart.net (140.173.48.1) DVMRP thresh^ 1 36 ms - -3 dc.dart.net (140.173.32.2) DVMRP thresh^ 1 44 ms + -2 bbn.dart.net (140.173.48.1) DVMRP thresh^ 1 36 ms + -3 dc.dart.net (140.173.32.2) DVMRP thresh^ 1 44 ms -4 darpa.dart.net (140.173.240.2) DVMRP thresh^ 16 47 ms -5 * * * noc.hpc.org (192.187.8.2) [mrouted 2.2] didn't respond Round trip time 95 ms @@ -531,7 +531,7 @@ The option syntax and the output format of are modeled after the unicast .Nm traceroute program written by -.An Van Jacobson . +.An Van Jacobson . .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr map-mbone 8 , .Xr mrinfo 8 , diff --git a/usr.sbin/mtree/mtree.8 b/usr.sbin/mtree/mtree.8 index 04bac92..dceaed0 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/mtree/mtree.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/mtree/mtree.8 @@ -97,9 +97,9 @@ This does not affect either the /set statements or the comment before each directory. It does however affect the comment before the close of each directory. .It Fl n -Do not emit pathname comments when creating a specification. Normally +Do not emit pathname comments when creating a specification. Normally a comment is emitted before each directory and before the close of that -directory when using the +directory when using the .Fl c option. .It Fl q @@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ The file group as a symbolic name. .It Cm md5digest The MD5 message digest of the file. .It Cm sha1digest -The +The .Tn FIPS 160-1 .Pq Dq Tn SHA-1 @@ -342,7 +342,7 @@ The .Nm utility appeared in .Bx 4.3 Reno . -The +The .Tn MD5 digest capability was added in .Fx 2.1 , diff --git a/usr.sbin/named.reload/named.reload.8 b/usr.sbin/named.reload/named.reload.8 index 9fc95a2..6bda6c9 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/named.reload/named.reload.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/named.reload/named.reload.8 @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ .\" - .\" Copyright (c) 1987, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. -.\" +.\" .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions .\" are met: @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ .\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors .\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software .\" without specific prior written permission. -.\" +.\" .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND .\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE @@ -32,14 +32,14 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" - .\" Portions Copyright (c) 1993 by Digital Equipment Corporation. -.\" +.\" .\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any .\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above .\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies, and that .\" the name of Digital Equipment Corporation not be used in advertising or .\" publicity pertaining to distribution of the document or software without .\" specific, written prior permission. -.\" +.\" .\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORP. DISCLAIMS ALL .\" WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL DIGITAL EQUIPMENT diff --git a/usr.sbin/named.restart/named.restart.8 b/usr.sbin/named.restart/named.restart.8 index efbddb7..2270225 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/named.restart/named.restart.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/named.restart/named.restart.8 @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ .\" - .\" Copyright (c) 1987, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. -.\" +.\" .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions .\" are met: @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ .\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors .\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software .\" without specific prior written permission. -.\" +.\" .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND .\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE @@ -32,14 +32,14 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" - .\" Portions Copyright (c) 1993 by Digital Equipment Corporation. -.\" +.\" .\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any .\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above .\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies, and that .\" the name of Digital Equipment Corporation not be used in advertising or .\" publicity pertaining to distribution of the document or software without .\" specific, written prior permission. -.\" +.\" .\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORP. DISCLAIMS ALL .\" WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL DIGITAL EQUIPMENT diff --git a/usr.sbin/newsyslog/newsyslog.8 b/usr.sbin/newsyslog/newsyslog.8 index 1ba4c1e..a9798c7 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/newsyslog/newsyslog.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/newsyslog/newsyslog.8 @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ .\" $FreeBSD$ .\" .\" Copyright 1988, 1989 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology -.\" +.\" .\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software .\" and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is .\" hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice @@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ is a program that should be scheduled to run periodically by .Xr cron 8 . When it is executed it archives log files if necessary. If a log file -is determined to require archiving, +is determined to require archiving, .Nm rearranges the files so that .Dq Va logfile @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ the last period's logs in it, has the next to last period's logs in it, and so on, up to a user-specified number of archived logs. Optionally the archived logs can be compressed to save -space. +space. .Pp A log can be archived for three reasons: .Bl -enum -offset indent @@ -67,11 +67,11 @@ Since the program is quite fast, it may be scheduled to run every hour without any ill effects, and mode three (above) assumes that this is so. .Pp -When starting up, +When starting up, .Nm reads in a configuration file to determine which logs may potentially be archived. -By default, this configuration file is +By default, this configuration file is .Pa /etc/newsyslog.conf . Each line of the file contains information about a particular log file that should be handled by @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ that should be handled by Each line has five mandatory fields and four optional fields, with whitespace separating each field. Blank lines or lines beginning with ``#'' are ignored. The fields of the configuration file are as -follows: +follows: .Pp .Bl -tag -width indent .It Ar logfile_name @@ -90,12 +90,12 @@ The ":" is essential, even if the .Ar owner or .Ar group -field is left blank. The field may be numeric, or a name which is +field is left blank. The field may be numeric, or a name which is present in .Pa /etc/passwd or .Pa /etc/group . -.It Ar mode +.It Ar mode Specify the mode of the log file and archives. .It Ar count Specify the number of archive files to be kept @@ -127,14 +127,14 @@ by an .So Li \&@ Sc Ns No -sign and a time in a restricted .Tn ISO 8601 -format or by an +format or by an .So Li \&$ Sc Ns No -sign -and a time specification for logfile rotation at a fixed time once +and a time specification for logfile rotation at a fixed time once per day, per week or per month. .Pp If a time is specified, the log file will only be trimmed if .Nm -is run within one hour of the specified time. If an +is run within one hour of the specified time. If an interval is specified, the log file will be trimmed if that many hours have passed since the last rotation. When both a time and an interval are specified, both conditions must be satisfied for the rotation to take @@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ The particular format of day, week and month specification is: and .Op Va M\&dd Ns Op Va D\&hh respectively. -Optional time fields default to midnight. +Optional time fields default to midnight. The ranges for day and hour secifications are: .Pp .Bl -tag -width Ds -compact -offset indent @@ -295,7 +295,7 @@ The following options can be used with .It Fl f Ar config_file Instruct .Nm -to use +to use .Ar config_file instead of .Pa /etc/newsyslog.conf @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ it will be created when .Nm is run. .It Fl v -Place +Place .Nm in verbose mode. In this mode it will print out each log and its reasons for either trimming that log or skipping it. @@ -330,7 +330,7 @@ were not specified. .It Fl r Remove the restriction that .Nm -must be running as root. Of course, +must be running as root. Of course, .Nm will not be able to send a HUP signal to .Xr syslogd 8 @@ -364,8 +364,8 @@ Copyright 1987, Massachusetts Institute of Technology Previous versions of the .Nm utility used the dot (``.'') character to -distinguish the group name. -Begining with +distinguish the group name. +Begining with .Fx 3.3 , this has been changed to a colon (``:'') character so that user and group names may contain the dot character. The dot (``.'') character is still diff --git a/usr.sbin/ngctl/ngctl.8 b/usr.sbin/ngctl/ngctl.8 index 8fae464..73198e0 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/ngctl/ngctl.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/ngctl/ngctl.8 @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ .\" Copyright (c) 1996-1999 Whistle Communications, Inc. .\" All rights reserved. -.\" +.\" .\" Subject to the following obligations and disclaimer of warranty, use and .\" redistribution of this software, in source or object code forms, with or .\" without modifications are expressly permitted by Whistle Communications; @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ .\" Communications, Inc. trademarks, including the mark "WHISTLE .\" COMMUNICATIONS" on advertising, endorsements, or otherwise except as .\" such appears in the above copyright notice or in the software. -.\" +.\" .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS BEING PROVIDED BY WHISTLE COMMUNICATIONS "AS IS", AND .\" TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, WHISTLE COMMUNICATIONS MAKES NO .\" REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THIS SOFTWARE, diff --git a/usr.sbin/nghook/nghook.8 b/usr.sbin/nghook/nghook.8 index 630a2c0..e9c5bd4 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/nghook/nghook.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/nghook/nghook.8 @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ .\" Copyright (c) 1996-1999 Whistle Communications, Inc. .\" All rights reserved. -.\" +.\" .\" Subject to the following obligations and disclaimer of warranty, use and .\" redistribution of this software, in source or object code forms, with or .\" without modifications are expressly permitted by Whistle Communications; @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ .\" Communications, Inc. trademarks, including the mark "WHISTLE .\" COMMUNICATIONS" on advertising, endorsements, or otherwise except as .\" such appears in the above copyright notice or in the software. -.\" +.\" .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS BEING PROVIDED BY WHISTLE COMMUNICATIONS "AS IS", AND .\" TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, WHISTLE COMMUNICATIONS MAKES NO .\" REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THIS SOFTWARE, @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Don't attempt to read any data from standard input. will continue reading from the node until stopped by a signal. .El .Sh BUGS -Although all input is read in unbuffered mode, +Although all input is read in unbuffered mode, there's no way to control the packetization of the input. .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr netgraph 3 , diff --git a/usr.sbin/pccard/pccardc/pccardc.8 b/usr.sbin/pccard/pccardc/pccardc.8 index 6b2ac5a..d9c6a50 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/pccard/pccardc/pccardc.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/pccard/pccardc/pccardc.8 @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ Displays the 64 registers of the card in Writes a single byte to the card's EEPROM at an offset address from the top specified in .Ar offs -(hex), +(hex), with a value specified in .Ar value (hex). @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ Specify a PC-CARD slot number in .Ar slot , a register number in .Ar reg -(hex) and +(hex) and a value in .Ar value (hex). diff --git a/usr.sbin/pccard/pccardd/pccard.conf.5 b/usr.sbin/pccard/pccardd/pccard.conf.5 index bda82c9..341008f 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/pccard/pccardd/pccard.conf.5 +++ b/usr.sbin/pccard/pccardd/pccard.conf.5 @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ file is included from the file .Pa /etc/defaults/pccard.conf , which contains the default resource pool settings and pccard identifiers database. -The user specific configuration can be specified in +The user specific configuration can be specified in .Pa /etc/pccard.conf when the user wishes to override these defaults and/or add additional entries. @@ -237,10 +237,10 @@ card version strings from the CIS are used to synthesize the string issued. .Ss "Wildcard entries" Following two wildcard entries of card identifiers are available for generic type of the cards: -.Pp +.Pp .Dl generic serial .Dl generic fixed_disk -.Pp +.Pp The keyword .Em serial matches ``Functional ID: Serial port/modem'' and @@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ The syntax is the same of .Em "card identifiers" but used ``generic'' instead of ``card'' in the first line. These are in the last of -.Nm +.Nm because unmatched cards with the other .Em card entries can match these entries secondly. diff --git a/usr.sbin/pccard/pccardd/pccardd.8 b/usr.sbin/pccard/pccardd/pccardd.8 index d868c2b..266c9ae 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/pccard/pccardd/pccardd.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/pccard/pccardd/pccardd.8 @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ .Op Fl v .Op Fl z .Op Fl i Ar IRQ -.Op Fl I +.Op Fl I .Op Fl f Ar configfile .Sh DESCRIPTION .Nm Pccardd diff --git a/usr.sbin/pciconf/pciconf.8 b/usr.sbin/pciconf/pciconf.8 index 74646c3..dca60eb 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/pciconf/pciconf.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/pciconf/pciconf.8 @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ command provides a command line interface to the functionality provided by .Pa /dev/pci Ns 's .Xr ioctl 2 interface. -With the +With the .Fl l option, it lists all devices found by the boot probe in the following format: .Bd -literal @@ -61,12 +61,12 @@ none0@pci0:6:0: class=0x020000 card=0x00000000 chip=0x802910ec rev=0x00 hdr=0x00 .Pp If the .Fl v -option is supplied, +option is supplied, .Nm will attempt to load the vendor/device information database, and print vendor, device, class and subclass identification strings for each device. .Pp -The first column gives the +The first column gives the device name, unit number, and .Ar selector . If there is no device configured in the kernel for the @@ -79,46 +79,46 @@ each unconfigured device that is encountered. The is in a form which may directly be used for the other forms of the command. The second column is the class code, with the class byte printed as two hex digits, followed by the sub-class and the interface bytes. -The third column gives the contents of the subvendorid register, introduced -in revision 2.1 of the +The third column gives the contents of the subvendorid register, introduced +in revision 2.1 of the .Tn PCI standard. It is 0 for most current (2.0) .Tn PCI cards, but is supposed to be loaded with a unique card identification code -in newly developed -.Tn PCI +in newly developed +.Tn PCI cards. The field consists of the card ID in the upper half and the card vendor ID in the lower half of the value. .Pp -The fourth column contains the chip device ID, which identifies the chip +The fourth column contains the chip device ID, which identifies the chip this card is based on. -It consists of two fields, identifying the chip and +It consists of two fields, identifying the chip and its vendor, as above. The fifth column prints the chip's revision. -The sixth column describes the header type. -Currently assigned header types are 0 for all devices except +The sixth column describes the header type. +Currently assigned header types are 0 for all devices except .Tn PCI to .Tn PCI bridges, and 1 for such bridge chips. If the most significant bit -of the header type register is set for -function 0 of a -.Tn PCI +of the header type register is set for +function 0 of a +.Tn PCI device, it is a .Em multi-function -device, which contains several (similar or independent) functions on +device, which contains several (similar or independent) functions on one chip. .Pp -The +The .Fl l option is the only one available to non-root users. -All other invocations of +All other invocations of .Nm require a -.Ar selector +.Ar selector of the form .Li pci Ns Va bus Ns \&: Ns Va device (optionally followed by @@ -134,27 +134,27 @@ With the flag, .Nm determines whether any driver has been assigned to the device -identified by +identified by .Ar selector . An exit status of zero indicates that the device has a driver; non-zero indicates that it does not. .Pp -The +The .Fl r -option reads a configuration space register at byte offset -.Ar reg +option reads a configuration space register at byte offset +.Ar reg of device .Ar selector and prints out its value in hexadecimal. The optional second .Ar reg2 specifies a range to read. -The -.Fl w -option writes the +The +.Fl w +option writes the .Ar value -into a configuration space register at byte offset -.Ar reg +into a configuration space register at byte offset +.Ar reg of device .Ar selector . For both operations, the flags @@ -175,15 +175,15 @@ This path can be overridden by setting the environment variable .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr ioctl 2 , .\" .Xr pci 4 , -.Xr kldload 8 +.Xr kldload 8 .Sh HISTORY -The +The .Nm command appeared first in .Fx 2.2 . -The +The .Fl a -option was added for +option was added for .Tn PCI KLD support in .Fx 3.0 . @@ -196,23 +196,23 @@ facility was written by and .An Garrett Wollman . .Sh BUGS -The -.Fl b -and +The +.Fl b +and .Fl h -options are implemented in +options are implemented in .Nm , -but not in the underlying +but not in the underlying .Xr ioctl 2 . .Pp -It might be useful to give non-root users access to the +It might be useful to give non-root users access to the .Fl a and .Fl r options. -But only root will be able to execute a +But only root will be able to execute a .Nm kldload to provide the device with a driver KLD, and reading of configuration space -registers may cause a failure in badly designed +registers may cause a failure in badly designed .Tn PCI chips. diff --git a/usr.sbin/pcvt/fed/fed.1 b/usr.sbin/pcvt/fed/fed.1 index c81dfae..fada309 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/pcvt/fed/fed.1 +++ b/usr.sbin/pcvt/fed/fed.1 @@ -42,14 +42,14 @@ is a curses based fullscreen application which allows to edit fontfiles interactively. .Pp .Nm -displays a command window, a character display window and a +displays a command window, a character display window and a character select window. .Pp In character select mode, it allows to move a character font to another position, exchange two character fonts or switch to edit character mode. .Pp -In character edit mode, the user is able to edit the selected +In character edit mode, the user is able to edit the selected character font or apply several operations to it. .Sh BUGS No known bugs diff --git a/usr.sbin/pcvt/kcon/kcon.1 b/usr.sbin/pcvt/kcon/kcon.1 index 7895d3d..6047ae0 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/pcvt/kcon/kcon.1 +++ b/usr.sbin/pcvt/kcon/kcon.1 @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ .Sh SYNOPSIS .Nm .Op Fl d Ar delay -.Op Fl l +.Op Fl l .Op Fl m Ar map .Op Fl o .Op Fl p diff --git a/usr.sbin/pcvt/keycap/man5/keycap.5 b/usr.sbin/pcvt/keycap/man5/keycap.5 index bf84cdf..b5208661 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/pcvt/keycap/man5/keycap.5 +++ b/usr.sbin/pcvt/keycap/man5/keycap.5 @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ upper case and blanks for readability. .It "de bool Resets Keyboard mapping to compiled-in default" .It "D<n> bool Disables key <n> completely" .It " -.It "m<n> num specify key numbers for ALT keys +.It "m<n> num specify key numbers for ALT keys .It "l<n> num specify key numbers for ALTGR keys .It "h<n> num specify key numbers for SHIFT keys .It "t<n> num specify key numbers for CONTROL keys diff --git a/usr.sbin/pcvt/loadfont/loadfont.1 b/usr.sbin/pcvt/loadfont/loadfont.1 index cb95917..a66a530 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/pcvt/loadfont/loadfont.1 +++ b/usr.sbin/pcvt/loadfont/loadfont.1 @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ The options are as follows: .Bl -tag -width Ds .It Fl c Specifies the slot, the font is to load into. -EGA boards have four +EGA boards have four slots and VGA boards have eight slots available for downloading fonts. .It Fl d Specifies the devicefile to use. diff --git a/usr.sbin/pcvt/scon/scon.1 b/usr.sbin/pcvt/scon/scon.1 index 77389b0..8657fd2 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/pcvt/scon/scon.1 +++ b/usr.sbin/pcvt/scon/scon.1 @@ -73,13 +73,13 @@ driver. The options are as follows: .Bl -tag -width Ds .It Fl a -Returns a string describing the video adaptor found by pcvt, the string +Returns a string describing the video adaptor found by pcvt, the string returned could be MDA, HGC, CGA, EGA, VGA or UNKNOWN. .It Fl c -Specify the screen number the current (displayed) screen should be switched +Specify the screen number the current (displayed) screen should be switched to. .It Fl d -Specify the device filename (i.e. /dev/ttyv2) further operations specified on +Specify the device filename (i.e. /dev/ttyv2) further operations specified on the command line should be applied to. .It Fl f Some programs which silently assume 24 lines when they run on a VT220 show @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ Sets 132 columns mode Sets 80 columns mode. .El .Pp -When switching between HP and VT mode, when switching the force 24 lines +When switching between HP and VT mode, when switching the force 24 lines mode on and off, or when switching between 80 and 132 columns operation, the screen is cleared, the scrolling region is reset and the cursor is placed in the home position. diff --git a/usr.sbin/pcvt/vgaio/vgaio.8 b/usr.sbin/pcvt/vgaio/vgaio.8 index 1ff7cee..3a211a3 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/pcvt/vgaio/vgaio.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/pcvt/vgaio/vgaio.8 @@ -1,10 +1,10 @@ -.\" +.\" .\" Copyright (c) 1994 Joerg Wunsch -.\" +.\" .\" All rights reserved. -.\" +.\" .\" This program is free software. -.\" +.\" .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions .\" are met: @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ .\" 4. The name of the developer may not be used to endorse or promote .\" products derived from this software without specific prior written .\" permission. -.\" +.\" .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE DEVELOPERS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. @@ -30,10 +30,10 @@ .\" THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. -.\" +.\" .\" $FreeBSD$ .\" -hm updated 31.12.94 -.\" +.\" .Dd December 31, 1994 .Dt VGAIO 8 .Os @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ the or any of the other tokens are ignored. They are not required anyway. .Pp -The +The .Dq Em mi needs a single unused argument to satisfy the syntax :-) (-hm). .Ss Access control diff --git a/usr.sbin/periodic/periodic.8 b/usr.sbin/periodic/periodic.8 index 52bc8cc..0e28423 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/periodic/periodic.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/periodic/periodic.8 @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ All remaining script output is delivered based on the value of the .Va <basedir>_output setting. .Pp -If this is set to a path name (beginning with a +If this is set to a path name (beginning with a .Dq / Character), output is simply logged to that file. .Xr newsyslog 8 @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ If .Va <basedir>_output is not set or is empty, output is sent to standard output. .Sh ENVIRONMENT -The +The .Nm command sets the .Ev PATH diff --git a/usr.sbin/pkg_install/add/pkg_add.1 b/usr.sbin/pkg_install/add/pkg_add.1 index 500f9e3..6bff9f1 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/pkg_install/add/pkg_add.1 +++ b/usr.sbin/pkg_install/add/pkg_add.1 @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ insure it poses no danger to your system's integrity. Pay particular attention to any +INSTALL, +POST-INSTALL, +DEINSTALL, +POST-DEINSTALL, +REQUIRE or +MTREE_DIRS files, and inspect the +CONTENTS file for .Cm @cwd , -.Cm @mode +.Cm @mode (check for setuid), .Cm @dirrm , .Cm @exec , @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ The named packages are installed. A package name of - will cause .Nm to read from stdin. If the packages are not found in the current -working directory, +working directory, .Nm will search them in each directory named by .Ev PKG_PATH . @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ you know what you are doing! .It Fl r Use the remote fetching feature. This will determine the appropriate -objformat and release and then fetch and install the package. +objformat and release and then fetch and install the package. .It Fl f Force installation to proceed even if prerequisite packages are not installed or the requirements script fails. Although @@ -123,8 +123,8 @@ options). .It Fl t Ar template Use .Ar template -as the input to -.Xr mktemp 3 +as the input to +.Xr mktemp 3 when creating a .Dq staging area . By default, this is the string @@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ final location, otherwise it is extracted into the staging area. .It If the package contains a .Ar require -file (see +file (see .Xr pkg_create 1 ) , then execute it with the following arguments: .Bd -ragged -offset indent -compact @@ -275,9 +275,9 @@ The keyword will not appear if separate scripts for pre-install and post-install are given during package creation time (using the .Fl i -and +and .Fl I -flags to +flags to .Xr pkg_create 1 ) . .It If @@ -294,19 +294,19 @@ file (see then mtree is invoked as: .Bd -ragged -offset indent -compact .Cm mtree -.Fl u -.Fl f +.Fl u +.Fl f .Ar mtreefile .Fl d -.Fl e -.Fl p -.Pa prefix +.Fl e +.Fl p +.Pa prefix .Ed where .Pa prefix is either the prefix specified with the .Fl p -flag or, if no +flag or, if no .Fl p flag was specified, the name of the first directory named by a .Cm @cwd @@ -314,11 +314,11 @@ directive within this package. .It If a .Ar post-install -script exists for the package, it is then executed as +script exists for the package, it is then executed as .Bd -ragged -offset indent -compact .Cm script .Ar pkg-name -.Ar POST-INSTALL +.Ar POST-INSTALL .Ed where .Ar pkg-name @@ -332,9 +332,9 @@ The keyword will not appear if separate scripts for pre-install and post-install are given during package creation time (using the .Fl i -and +and .Fl I -flags to +flags to .Xr pkg_create 1 ) . .Pp Reasoning behind passing keywords such as @@ -355,7 +355,7 @@ script, description, and display files are copied into .Pa /var/db/pkg/<pkg-name> for subsequent possible use by .Xr pkg_delete 1 . -Any package dependencies are recorded in the other packages' +Any package dependencies are recorded in the other packages' .Pa /var/db/pkg/<other-pkg>/+REQUIRED_BY file (if the environment variable PKG_DBDIR is set, this overrides the @@ -394,27 +394,27 @@ The environment variables and .Ev TMPDIR , in that order, are taken to name temporary directories where -.Nm +.Nm will attempt to create its staging area in. If these variables are not present or if the directories named lack -sufficient space, then +sufficient space, then .Nm -will use the first of +will use the first of .Pa /var/tmp , -.Pa /tmp +.Pa /tmp or .Pa /usr/tmp with sufficient space. .Pp The environment variable .Ev PACKAGEROOT -specifies an alternate location for +specifies an alternate location for .Nm to fetch from. The fetch URL is built using this environment variable and the automatic directory logic that .Nm -uses when the +uses when the .Fl r option is invoked. An example setting would be @@ -422,13 +422,13 @@ An example setting would be .Pp The environment variable .Ev PACKAGESITE -specifies an alternate location for +specifies an alternate location for .Nm to fetch from. This variable subverts the automatic directory logic that .Nm -uses when the +uses when the .Fl r option is invoked. Thus it should be a complete URL to the remote package file(s). @@ -445,7 +445,7 @@ Next choice if .Pa /var/tmp does not exist or has insufficient space. .It Pa /usr/tmp -Last choice if +Last choice if .Pa /var/tmp and .Pa /tmp @@ -471,7 +471,7 @@ Hard links between files in a distribution are only preserved if either (1) the staging area is on the same file system as the target directory of all the links to the file, or (2) all the links to the file are bracketed by .Cm @cwd -directives in the contents file, +directives in the contents file, .Em and the link names are extracted with a single .Cm tar diff --git a/usr.sbin/pkg_install/create/pkg_create.1 b/usr.sbin/pkg_install/create/pkg_create.1 index 92809cb..c7d61ae 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/pkg_install/create/pkg_create.1 +++ b/usr.sbin/pkg_install/create/pkg_create.1 @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ .\" .\" .\" @(#)pkg_create.1 -.\" $FreeBSD$ +.\" $FreeBSD$ .\" .\" hacked up by John Kohl for NetBSD--fixed a few bugs, extended keywords, .\" added dependency tracking, etc. @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ during package creation. .It Fl t Ar template Use .Ar template -as the input to +as the input to .Xr mktemp 3 . By default, this is the string .Pa /tmp/instmp.XXXXXX , @@ -233,15 +233,15 @@ legal notices on almost-free software, etc. .It Fl m Ar mtreefile Run .Xr mtree 8 -with input from mtreefile before the package is installed. +with input from mtreefile before the package is installed. Mtree is invoked as .Cm mtree -.Fl u -.Fl f +.Fl u +.Fl f .Ar mtreefile .Fl d -.Fl e -.Fl p +.Fl e +.Fl p .Pa prefix , where .Pa prefix @@ -391,12 +391,12 @@ trying to document some particularly hairy sequence that may trip someone up later. .It Cm @ignore Used internally to tell extraction to ignore the next file (don't -copy it anywhere), as it's used for some special purpose. +copy it anywhere), as it's used for some special purpose. .It Cm @ignore_inst Similar to .Cm @ignore , but the ignoring of the next file is delayed one evaluation cycle. This -makes it possible to use this directive in the +makes it possible to use this directive in the .Ar packinglist file, so you can pack a specialized datafile in with a distribution for your install script (or @@ -426,15 +426,15 @@ Declare .Pa name as an .Xr mtree 8 -input file to be used at install time (see +input file to be used at install time (see .Fl m above). Only the first .Cm @mtree -directive is honored. +directive is honored. .It Cm @display Ar name Declare .Pa name -as the file to be displayed at install time (see +as the file to be displayed at install time (see .Fl D above). .It Cm @pkgdep Ar pkgname @@ -454,14 +454,14 @@ The environment variable .Ev PKG_TMPDIR names the directory where .Nm -will attempt to create its temporary files. +will attempt to create its temporary files. If .Ev PKG_TMPDIR -is not set, +is not set, the directory named by the contents of -.Ev TMPDIR +.Ev TMPDIR will be used. -If neither of +If neither of .Ev PKG_TMPDIR and .Ev TMPDIR @@ -470,16 +470,16 @@ are set, the builtin defaults are used. .Bl -tag -width /usr/tmp -compact .It Pa /var/tmp Temporary directory if environmental variables -.Ev PKG_TMPDIR +.Ev PKG_TMPDIR and .Ev TMPDIR are not set. .It Pa /tmp -The next choice if +The next choice if .Pa /var/tmp does not exist. .It Pa /usr/tmp -The last choice if +The last choice if .Pa /tmp is unsuitable. .El diff --git a/usr.sbin/pkg_install/delete/pkg_delete.1 b/usr.sbin/pkg_install/delete/pkg_delete.1 index 2657d61..c998bb3 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/pkg_install/delete/pkg_delete.1 +++ b/usr.sbin/pkg_install/delete/pkg_delete.1 @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ Pay particular attention to any +INSTALL, +POST-INSTALL, +DEINSTALL, +POST-DEINSTALL, +REQUIRE or +MTREE_DIRS files, and inspect the +CONTENTS file for .Cm @cwd , -.Cm @mode +.Cm @mode (check for setuid), .Cm @dirrm , .Cm @exec , @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ normal files/directories or with the directive) will be removed at deinstallation time. This option tells .Nm to also remove any directories that were emptied as a result of removing -the package. +the package. .It Fl f Force removal of the package, even if a dependency is recorded or the deinstall or require script fails. @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ regular expression from the list. .El .Sh TECHNICAL DETAILS .Nm -does pretty much what it says. It examines installed package records in +does pretty much what it says. It examines installed package records in .Pa /var/db/pkg/<pkg-name> , deletes the package contents, and finally removes the package records. If the environment variable @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ option is given). .Pp If the package contains a .Ar require -file (see +file (see .Xr pkg_create 1 ) , then this is executed first as .Bd -ragged -offset indent -compact @@ -185,9 +185,9 @@ The keyword will not appear if separate scripts for deinstall and post-deinstall are given during package creation time (using the .Fl k -and +and .Fl K -flags to +flags to .Xr pkg_create 1 ) . .Pp If a @@ -219,9 +219,9 @@ The keyword will not appear if separate scripts for deinstall and post-deinstall are given during package creation time (using the .Fl k -and +and .Fl K -flags to +flags to .Xr pkg_create 1 ) . .Pp Reasoning behind passing keywords such as diff --git a/usr.sbin/pkg_install/info/pkg_info.1 b/usr.sbin/pkg_install/info/pkg_info.1 index 1aa6267..ac2d448 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/pkg_install/info/pkg_info.1 +++ b/usr.sbin/pkg_install/info/pkg_info.1 @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Show files that don't match the recorded checksum. .It Fl i Show the install script (if any) for each package. .It Fl I -Show an index line for each package. This option takes +Show an index line for each package. This option takes precedence over all other package formatting options. .It Fl k Show the de-install script (if any) for each package. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ automatically expands shell glob patterns in the For the specified .Ar filename argument show which package it belongs to. If the file is not in the -current directory, and does not have an absolute path, then the +current directory, and does not have an absolute path, then the .Ev PATH is searched using .Xr which 1 . @@ -142,8 +142,8 @@ each field. .It Fl t Ar template Use .Ar template -as the input to -.Xr mktemp 3 +as the input to +.Xr mktemp 3 when creating a .Dq staging area . By default, this is the string @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ to fill in with a unique ID. Note: This should really not be necessary with .Nm , since very little information is extracted from each package -and one would have to have a very small +and one would have to have a very small .Pa /tmp indeed to overflow it. .Ed @@ -185,16 +185,16 @@ specifies an alternative location for the installed package database. .It Pa /var/tmp Used if the environment variables .Ev PKG_TMPDIR -and +and .Ev TMPDIR are not set, or if the directories named have insufficient space. .It Pa /tmp -The next choice if +The next choice if .Pa /var/tmp does not exist or has insufficient space. .It Pa /usr/tmp -The last choice if -.Pa /tmp +The last choice if +.Pa /tmp is unsuitable. .It Pa /var/db/pkg Default location of the installed package database. diff --git a/usr.sbin/pkg_install/sign/pkg_sign.1 b/usr.sbin/pkg_install/sign/pkg_sign.1 index 7d7d59d..7fea4b7 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/pkg_install/sign/pkg_sign.1 +++ b/usr.sbin/pkg_install/sign/pkg_sign.1 @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ embeds a cryptographic signature within a gzip file .Ar type can be .Cm pgp -(default), +(default), .Cm sha1 , or .Cm x509 . diff --git a/usr.sbin/pkg_install/version/pkg_version.1 b/usr.sbin/pkg_install/version/pkg_version.1 index 0a64ec7..3a4d9a8 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/pkg_install/version/pkg_version.1 +++ b/usr.sbin/pkg_install/version/pkg_version.1 @@ -43,9 +43,9 @@ The .Nm command is used to produce a report of non-base software packages -installed using the +installed using the .Xr pkg_add 1 -command. +command. .Pp Each package's version number is checked against one of two sources to see if that package may require updating. If the package contains @@ -53,14 +53,14 @@ information about its origin in the .Fx ports tree, and a version number can be determined from the port's .Pa Makefile , -then the version number from the +then the version number from the .Pa Makefile will be used to determine whether the installed package is up-to-date or requires updating. .Pp -If no origin for a package can be found, or if the port's +If no origin for a package can be found, or if the port's .Pa Makefile -cannot be located, +cannot be located, .Nm will search for the package in the ports collection index file (typically @@ -68,9 +68,9 @@ will search for the package in the ports collection index file Any matching version number(s) there will be used to determine whether the installed package is up-to-date or requires updating. .Pp -Generally, using the version number from a port's +Generally, using the version number from a port's .Pa Makefile -will provide a more accurate result, since, unlike the index file, it +will provide a more accurate result, since, unlike the index file, it provides an unambiguous current version number, even when multiple versions of a port exist in the ports collection. Moreover, the ports collection index file is only updated at @@ -88,8 +88,8 @@ The installed version of the package is newer than the current version. This situation can arise with an out-of-date index file, or when testing new ports. .It Li \&? -The installed package does not appear in the index. -This could be due to an out of date index or a package taken from a PR +The installed package does not appear in the index. +This could be due to an out of date index or a package taken from a PR that has not yet been committed. .It Li * There are multiple versions of a particular software package @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ was unable to compare the version number of the installed package with the corresponding entry in the index. .El .Sh OPTIONS -.Nm +.Nm supports several command-line arguments: .Bl -tag -width indent .It Fl c @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ This feature does not .Ef constitute an automated packages updating system. -The output of this command +The output of this command .Bf Em must .Ef @@ -129,11 +129,11 @@ Enable debugging output. .It Fl h Print help message. .It Fl l -Limit the output to those packages whose status flag matches the +Limit the output to those packages whose status flag matches the character(s) in .Ar limchar . More than one character can be specified in -.Ar limchar . +.Ar limchar . Note that because some of the status flag characters are also special to the shell, it is best to quote .Ar limchar @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ with single quotes. Limit the output to those packages whose status flag doesn't match .Ar limchar . You may specify more than one character to match in -.Ar limchar . +.Ar limchar . Note that because some of the status flag characters are also special to the shell, it is best to quote .Ar limchar @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ These commands must not .Ef be run without suitable editing. -They should be treated as suggestions, and may need to be reordered +They should be treated as suggestions, and may need to be reordered to account for dependencies between installed packages, or may need to be disregarded if multiple versions of an installed package can coexist. Blindly running the output of this command may leave a system in an @@ -227,12 +227,12 @@ The following command compares two package version strings: .An Doug Barton Aq DougB@gorean.org , .An Akinori MUSHA Aq knu@FreeBSD.org .Sh BUGS -The commands output feature is -.Bf Em +The commands output feature is +.Bf Em not .Ef an automated ports/packages updating system. -It does not even attempt to handle dependencies between installed +It does not even attempt to handle dependencies between installed packages correctly, and can produce incorrect results if multiple versions of a package can coexist on a system. .Pp diff --git a/usr.sbin/ppp/ppp.8 b/usr.sbin/ppp/ppp.8 index 183e563..39dff37 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/ppp/ppp.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/ppp/ppp.8 @@ -386,7 +386,7 @@ MPPE is Microsoft Point to Point Encryption scheme. It is possible to configure .Nm to participate in Microsoft's Windows VPN. -For now, +For now, .Nm can only get encryption keys from CHAP 81 authentication. .Nm @@ -1457,7 +1457,7 @@ ppp-in: add 10.0.1.0/24 HISADDR .Ed .Pp -It is necessary to put the +It is necessary to put the .Dq add command in .Pa ppp.linkup @@ -2796,7 +2796,7 @@ connection. .It mppe Default: Enabled and Accepted. This is Microsoft Point to Point Encryption scheme. -MPPE key size can be +MPPE key size can be 40-, 56- and 128-bits. Refer to .Dq set mppe diff --git a/usr.sbin/ppp/ppp.8.m4 b/usr.sbin/ppp/ppp.8.m4 index 183e563..39dff37 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/ppp/ppp.8.m4 +++ b/usr.sbin/ppp/ppp.8.m4 @@ -386,7 +386,7 @@ MPPE is Microsoft Point to Point Encryption scheme. It is possible to configure .Nm to participate in Microsoft's Windows VPN. -For now, +For now, .Nm can only get encryption keys from CHAP 81 authentication. .Nm @@ -1457,7 +1457,7 @@ ppp-in: add 10.0.1.0/24 HISADDR .Ed .Pp -It is necessary to put the +It is necessary to put the .Dq add command in .Pa ppp.linkup @@ -2796,7 +2796,7 @@ connection. .It mppe Default: Enabled and Accepted. This is Microsoft Point to Point Encryption scheme. -MPPE key size can be +MPPE key size can be 40-, 56- and 128-bits. Refer to .Dq set mppe diff --git a/usr.sbin/pppctl/pppctl.8 b/usr.sbin/pppctl/pppctl.8 index 3154de0..1e90579 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/pppctl/pppctl.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/pppctl/pppctl.8 @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ commands in .Xr editline 3 , .Xr editrc 5 , .Xr services 5 , -.Xr ppp 8 +.Xr ppp 8 .Sh HISTORY The .Nm diff --git a/usr.sbin/pppd/pppd.8 b/usr.sbin/pppd/pppd.8 index 7d19962..8f7d0f1 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/pppd/pppd.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/pppd/pppd.8 @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ bytes of data). Set the MTU [Maximum Transmit Unit] value to \fIn\fR. Unless the peer requests a smaller value via MRU negotiation, pppd will request that the kernel networking code send data packets of no more -than \fIn\fR bytes through the PPP network interface. +than \fIn\fR bytes through the PPP network interface. .TP .B passive Enables the "passive" option in the LCP. With this option, pppd will @@ -826,9 +826,9 @@ the secret in /etc/ppp/pap-secrets would be "", which will match any password supplied by the peer. This avoids the need to have the same secret in two places. .LP -Additional checks are performed when the \fBlogin\fR option is used. +Additional checks are performed when the \fBlogin\fR option is used. If the file /etc/ppp/ppp.deny exists, and the user is listed in it, -the authentication fails. If the file /etc/ppp/ppp.shells exists and +the authentication fails. If the file /etc/ppp/ppp.shells exists and the user's normal login shell is not listed, the authentication fails. .LP Authentication must be satisfactorily completed before IPCP (or any @@ -1064,7 +1064,7 @@ executed with the parameters .IP \fIinterface-name tty-device speed network-number local-IPX-node-address remote-IPX-node-address local-IPX-routing-protocol remote-IPX-routing-protocol -local-IPX-router-name remote-IPX-router-name ipparam pppd-pid\fR +local-IPX-router-name remote-IPX-router-name ipparam pppd-pid\fR .IP The local-IPX-routing-protocol and remote-IPX-routing-protocol field may be one of the following: diff --git a/usr.sbin/prefix/prefix.8 b/usr.sbin/prefix/prefix.8 index a35deea..e22e6d0 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/prefix/prefix.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/prefix/prefix.8 @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ .\" Copyright (C) 1995, 1996, 1997, and 1998 WIDE Project. .\" All rights reserved. -.\" +.\" .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions .\" are met: @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ .\" 3. Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors .\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software .\" without specific prior written permission. -.\" +.\" .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND .\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE diff --git a/usr.sbin/pw/pw.8 b/usr.sbin/pw/pw.8 index 96538ae..0fbb69f 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/pw/pw.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/pw/pw.8 @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ .\" Copyright (C) 1996 .\" David L. Nugent. All rights reserved. -.\" +.\" .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions .\" are met: @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ .\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright .\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the .\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. -.\" +.\" .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY DAVID L. NUGENT AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND .\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE @@ -194,15 +194,15 @@ Note that only operates on the local user and group files. NIS users and groups must be maintained on the NIS server. .Nm Pw -handles updating the -.Pa passwd , -.Pa master.passwd , +handles updating the +.Pa passwd , +.Pa master.passwd , .Pa group and the secure and insecure password database files, and must be run as root. .Pp The first one or two keywords provided to -.Nm +.Nm on the command line provide the context for the remainder of the arguments. The keywords .Ar user @@ -217,8 +217,8 @@ or .Ar next in any order. (For example, -.Ar showuser , -.Ar usershow , +.Ar showuser , +.Ar usershow , .Ar show user , and .Ar user show @@ -270,10 +270,10 @@ is preferable to interpret status codes returned by .Nm rather than messing up a carefully formatted display. .It Fl N -This option is available in -.Ar add -and -.Ar modify +This option is available in +.Ar add +and +.Ar modify operations, and tells .Nm to output the result of the operation without updating the user or group @@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ after changing to the directory This is intended to allow automatic updating of NIS database files. If separate passwd and group files are being used by NIS, then use the .Fl y Ar path -option to specify the location of the NIS passwd database so that +option to specify the location of the NIS passwd database so that .Nm will concurrently update it with the system password databases. @@ -333,7 +333,7 @@ or keywords on the command line without using the .Fl n or -.Fl u +.Fl u options. .El .Pp @@ -354,13 +354,13 @@ file itself. .It Fl d Ar dir This option sets the account's home directory. Normally, you will only use this if the home directory is to be different from the -default determined from +default determined from .Pa /etc/pw.conf - normally .Pa /home with the account name as a subdirectory. .It Fl e Ar date -Set the account's expiration date. +Set the account's expiration date. Format of the date is either a UNIX time in decimal, or a date in .Ql dd-mmm-yy[yy] format, where dd is the day, mmm is the month, either in numeric or alphabetic format @@ -424,10 +424,10 @@ overwritten from the skeleton files. When a user's home directory is created, it will by default be a subdirectory of the .Ar basehome directory as specified by the -.Fl b +.Fl b option (see below), bearing the name of the new account. This can be overridden by the -.Fl d +.Fl d option on the command line, if desired. .It Fl k Ar dir Set the @@ -437,7 +437,7 @@ the user's home directory is created. This option only has meaning when used with the .Fl d or -.Fl m +.Fl m flags. .It Fl s Ar shell Set or changes the user's login shell to @@ -701,7 +701,7 @@ that use .Nm . .Sh GROUP OPTIONS The -.Fl C +.Fl C and .Fl q options (explained at the start of the previous section) are available @@ -790,7 +790,7 @@ and options as described above are accepted by these commands. .Sh DIAGNOSTICS .Nm Pw -returns EXIT_SUCCESS on successful operation, otherwise +returns EXIT_SUCCESS on successful operation, otherwise .Nm returns one of the following exit codes defined by @@ -888,7 +888,7 @@ specified in the passwd file may be used by default. .Bl -tag -width /etc/master.passwd.new -compact .It Pa /etc/master.passwd The user database -.It Pa /etc/passwd +.It Pa /etc/passwd A Version 7 format password file .It Pa /etc/login.conf The user capabilities database diff --git a/usr.sbin/pw/pw.conf.5 b/usr.sbin/pw/pw.conf.5 index 7da27a1..9511309 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/pw/pw.conf.5 +++ b/usr.sbin/pw/pw.conf.5 @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ .\" Copyright (C) 1996 .\" David L. Nugent. All rights reserved. -.\" +.\" .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions .\" are met: @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ .\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright .\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the .\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. -.\" +.\" .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY DAVID L. NUGENT AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND .\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ .\" .Dd December 9, 1996 .Dt PW.CONF 5 -.Os +.Os .Sh NAME .Nm pw.conf .Nd format of the pw.conf configuration file @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ blank lines and lines commencing with a character are considered comments, and any remaining lines are examined for a leading keyword, followed by corresponding data. .Pp -Keywords recognized by +Keywords recognized by .Xr pw 8 are: .Bl -tag -width password_days -offset indent -compact @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ These shells must exist in one of the directories nominated by The .Ar defaultshell keyword nominates which shell program to use for new users when -none is specified on the +none is specified on the .Xr pw 8 command line. .Pp @@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ is used, then each new user will have a corresponding group of their own created automatically. This is the recommended procedure for new users as it best secures each user's files against interference by other users of the system -irrespective of the +irrespective of the .Em umask normally used by the user. .Pp diff --git a/usr.sbin/pwd_mkdb/pwd_mkdb.8 b/usr.sbin/pwd_mkdb/pwd_mkdb.8 index fd0a8cb..3d42461 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/pwd_mkdb/pwd_mkdb.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/pwd_mkdb/pwd_mkdb.8 @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ in megabytes will be a little bit more than twice the figure specified here. The default is 2 megabytes. .El .Pp -The two databases differ in that the secure version contains the user's +The two databases differ in that the secure version contains the user's encrypted password and the insecure version has an asterisk (``*'') .Pp The databases are used by the C library password routines (see @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ directory. There are the obvious races with multiple people running .Nm on different password files at the same time. -The front-ends to +The front-ends to .Nm , .Xr chpass 1 , .Xr passwd 1 diff --git a/usr.sbin/raycontrol/raycontrol.8 b/usr.sbin/raycontrol/raycontrol.8 index 6cb9389..4bbaef8 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/raycontrol/raycontrol.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/raycontrol/raycontrol.8 @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ flag will cause to print out the statistics counters instead of the card settings. .It Fl i Ar iface Fl t Ar tx rate Set the transmit rate of the specified interface. -The +The NICs support a maximum transmit rate of 2Mbps. The following table shows the legal transmit rate settings and the corresponding transmit speeds: @@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ command first appeared in The .Nm command was written by -.An Duncan Barclay Aq dmlb@ragnet.demon.co.uk +.An Duncan Barclay Aq dmlb@ragnet.demon.co.uk and based on the .Nm wicontrol command by diff --git a/usr.sbin/rip6query/rip6query.8 b/usr.sbin/rip6query/rip6query.8 index e16df23..210234f 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/rip6query/rip6query.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/rip6query/rip6query.8 @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ .\" .\" Copyright (C) 1998 and 1999 WIDE Project. .\" All rights reserved. -.\" +.\" .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions .\" are met: @@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ .\" 3. Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors .\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software .\" without specific prior written permission. -.\" +.\" .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND .\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE diff --git a/usr.sbin/rmt/rmt.8 b/usr.sbin/rmt/rmt.8 index 658f980..824d725 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/rmt/rmt.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/rmt/rmt.8 @@ -52,14 +52,14 @@ or .Xr rcmd 3 call. .Pp -The +The .Nm program accepts requests specific to the manipulation of magnetic tapes, performs the commands, then responds with a status indication. All responses are in .Tn ASCII and in -one of two forms. +one of two forms. Successful commands have responses of: .Bd -ragged -offset indent .Sm off @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ indicates that a newline should be supplied: .No \en Ar mode No \en .Xc .Sm on -Open the specified +Open the specified .Ar device using the indicated .Ar mode . @@ -158,9 +158,9 @@ If exceeds the size of the data buffer (10 kilobytes), it is truncated to the data buffer size. .Nm Rmt -then performs the requested +then performs the requested .Xr read 2 -and responds with +and responds with .Sm off .Sy A Ar count-read No \en .Sm on @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ command using the specified parameters. The parameters are interpreted as the .Tn ASCII representations of the decimal values -to place in the +to place in the .Ar mt_op and .Ar mt_count @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ status buffer, then the status buffer is sent (in binary). .El .Pp -Any other command causes +Any other command causes .Nm to exit. .Sh DIAGNOSTICS diff --git a/usr.sbin/rpc.statd/rpc.statd.8 b/usr.sbin/rpc.statd/rpc.statd.8 index c715410..901735e 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/rpc.statd/rpc.statd.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/rpc.statd/rpc.statd.8 @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ .Dt RPC.STATD 8 .Os .Sh NAME -.Nm rpc.statd +.Nm rpc.statd .Nd host status monitoring daemon .Sh SYNOPSIS .Nm diff --git a/usr.sbin/rpc.yppasswdd/rpc.yppasswdd.8 b/usr.sbin/rpc.yppasswdd/rpc.yppasswdd.8 index 1eaf1eb..8a81795 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/rpc.yppasswdd/rpc.yppasswdd.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/rpc.yppasswdd/rpc.yppasswdd.8 @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Note: if the template file specified with this flag is will also automatically invoke .Xr pwd_mkdb 8 to rebuild the local password databases in addition to the NIS -maps. +maps. .It Fl d Ar domain The .Nm diff --git a/usr.sbin/rtadvd/rtadvd.conf.5 b/usr.sbin/rtadvd/rtadvd.conf.5 index 31a7fbc..29f75ca 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/rtadvd/rtadvd.conf.5 +++ b/usr.sbin/rtadvd/rtadvd.conf.5 @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ and Bit 6 .Li 0x40 .Pc means Other stateful configuration flag bit. -Bit 4 +Bit 4 .Po .Li 0x10 .Pc @@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ Bit 4 .Po .Li 0x10 .Pc -and +and and Bit 3 .Po .Li 0x08 diff --git a/usr.sbin/rtprio/rtprio.1 b/usr.sbin/rtprio/rtprio.1 index 82a57a7..f19f860 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/rtprio/rtprio.1 +++ b/usr.sbin/rtprio/rtprio.1 @@ -32,37 +32,37 @@ .\" .Dd July 23, 1994 .Dt RTPRIO 1 -.Os +.Os .Sh NAME .Nm rtprio , .Nm idprio -.Nd execute, examine or modify a utility's or process's realtime +.Nd execute, examine or modify a utility's or process's realtime or idletime scheduling priority .Sh SYNOPSIS .Nm [id|rt]prio -.Nm [id|rt]prio +.Nm [id|rt]prio .Oo Fl Oc Ns Ar pid -.Nm [id|rt]prio +.Nm [id|rt]prio .Ar priority .Ar command .Op args -.Nm [id|rt]prio +.Nm [id|rt]prio .Ar priority .Fl Ar pid -.Nm [id|rt]prio +.Nm [id|rt]prio .Fl t .Ar command .Op args -.Nm [id|rt]prio +.Nm [id|rt]prio .Fl t .Fl Ar pid .Sh DESCRIPTION .Nm Rtprio -is used for controlling realtime process scheduling. +is used for controlling realtime process scheduling. .Pp .Nm Idprio is used for controlling idletime process scheduling, and can be called -with the same options as +with the same options as .Nm . .Pp A process with a realtime priority is not subject to priority @@ -73,9 +73,9 @@ A process with an idle priority will run only when no other process is runnable and then only if its idle priority is equal or greater than all other runnable idle priority processes. .Pp -.Nm Rtprio +.Nm Rtprio or -.Nm idprio +.Nm idprio when called without arguments will return the realtime priority of the current process. .Pp @@ -85,20 +85,20 @@ is called with 1 argument, it will return the realtime priority of the process with the specified .Ar pid . .Pp -If +If .Ar priority is specified, the process or program is run at that realtime priority. -If +If .Fl t is specified, the process or program is run as a normal (non-realtime) -process. +process. .Pp If .Ar -pid is specified, the process with the process identifier .Ar pid will be modified, else if -.Ar command +.Ar command is specified, that program is run with its arguments. .Pp .Ar Priority diff --git a/usr.sbin/rwhod/rwhod.8 b/usr.sbin/rwhod/rwhod.8 index 049ca1a..3102e7f 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/rwhod/rwhod.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/rwhod/rwhod.8 @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ those old won't hear the reports generated by this program. .Pp The server transmits and receives messages at the port indicated -in the ``who'' service specification; see +in the ``who'' service specification; see .Xr services 5 . The messages sent and received, are of the form: .Bd -literal -offset indent @@ -178,15 +178,15 @@ struct whod { All fields are converted to network byte order prior to transmission. The load averages are as calculated by the .Xr w 1 -program, and represent load averages over the 5, 10, and 15 minute +program, and represent load averages over the 5, 10, and 15 minute intervals prior to a server's transmission; they are multiplied by 100 for representation in an integer. The host name included is that returned by the .Xr gethostname 3 system call, with any trailing domain name omitted. The array at the end of the message contains information about -the users logged in to the sending machine. This information -includes the contents of the +the users logged in to the sending machine. This information +includes the contents of the .Xr utmp 5 entry for each non-idle terminal line and a value indicating the time in seconds since a character was last received on the terminal line. diff --git a/usr.sbin/sa/sa.8 b/usr.sbin/sa/sa.8 index 645df0e..9e54a50 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/sa/sa.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/sa/sa.8 @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ Average number of I/O operations per execution Sum of user and system time, in minutes .It Dv cpu Same as -.Dv cp +.Dv cp .It Dv k CPU-time averaged core usage, in 1k units .It Dv k*sec @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ those used only once under the name ``***other''. If printing command statistics, sort output by the sum of user and system time divided by number of calls. .It Fl c -In addition to the number of calls and the user, system and real times +In addition to the number of calls and the user, system and real times for each command, print their percentage of the total over all commands. .It Fl d If printing command statistics, sort by the average number of disk @@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ flag is specified, only the .Fl k , .Fl q , and -.Fl s +.Fl s flags are honored. .Pp The diff --git a/usr.sbin/sade/sade.8 b/usr.sbin/sade/sade.8 index 432d62b..8c87a10 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/sade/sade.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/sade/sade.8 @@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ functions taking their arguments by examining known variable names. This requires that you be sure to assign the relevant variables before calling a function which requires them. .Pp -The +The .Ar noError variable can be assigned before each directive: this will cause any error detected while processing the directive itself to be ignored. diff --git a/usr.sbin/setkey/setkey.8 b/usr.sbin/setkey/setkey.8 index bc1201b..0fedfe7 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/setkey/setkey.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/setkey/setkey.8 @@ -411,7 +411,7 @@ You have to consider and be careful to use them. .Li icmp .Li tcp .Li udp -all protocols +all protocols .\" .Pp .It Ar policy diff --git a/usr.sbin/slstat/slstat.8 b/usr.sbin/slstat/slstat.8 index bba0492..26e8345 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/slstat/slstat.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/slstat/slstat.8 @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ times we could not find a connection state collisions with end of clists. If you get many collisions (more than one or two a day) you probably do not have enough clists -and you should increase +and you should increase .Dv nclist in param.c. .El diff --git a/usr.sbin/spray/spray.8 b/usr.sbin/spray/spray.8 index cc7047a..6718e60 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/spray/spray.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/spray/spray.8 @@ -28,16 +28,16 @@ .Os .Sh NAME .Nm spray -.Nd send many packets to host +.Nd send many packets to host .Sh SYNOPSIS .Nm -.Op Fl c Ar count -.Op Fl d Ar delay +.Op Fl c Ar count +.Op Fl d Ar delay .Op Fl l Ar length -.Ar host +.Ar host .Sh DESCRIPTION .Nm Spray -sends multiple RPC packets to +sends multiple RPC packets to .Ar host and records how many of them were correctly received and how long it took. .Pp @@ -52,17 +52,17 @@ Pause .Ar delay microseconds between sending each packet. .It Fl l Ar length -Set the length of the packet that holds the RPC call message to +Set the length of the packet that holds the RPC call message to .Ar length bytes. Not all values of .Ar length -are possible because RPC data is encoded using XDR. +are possible because RPC data is encoded using XDR. .Nm Spray rounds up to the nearest possible value. .El .Pp -.Nm Spray +.Nm Spray is intended for use in network testing, measurement, and management. This command .Em "can be very hard on a network and should be used with caution" . diff --git a/usr.sbin/stallion/bootcode/stl.4 b/usr.sbin/stallion/bootcode/stl.4 index 2572271..7fd9362 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/stallion/bootcode/stl.4 +++ b/usr.sbin/stallion/bootcode/stl.4 @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ EasyConnection 8/64-AT 23 0x1000 EasyConnection 8/64-EISA 24 0x10000 .Ed .Pp -Following are some examples of configuration entries for each of the +Following are some examples of configuration entries for each of the boards supported by the .Nm stli driver. diff --git a/usr.sbin/stallion/stlstats/stlstats.8 b/usr.sbin/stallion/stlstats/stlstats.8 index fb41906..985c67e 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/stallion/stlstats/stlstats.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/stallion/stlstats/stlstats.8 @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Output only the board type information. This output is useful for scripts or other programs that need to know a little bit about the board (for example an automated download script). .Nm Stlstats -will not enter full screen interactive mode. +will not enter full screen interactive mode. .It Fl c Ar control-device Specify the board control device through which to gather port statistics. The default is diff --git a/usr.sbin/sysinstall/sysinstall.8 b/usr.sbin/sysinstall/sysinstall.8 index 432d62b..8c87a10 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/sysinstall/sysinstall.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/sysinstall/sysinstall.8 @@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ functions taking their arguments by examining known variable names. This requires that you be sure to assign the relevant variables before calling a function which requires them. .Pp -The +The .Ar noError variable can be assigned before each directive: this will cause any error detected while processing the directive itself to be ignored. diff --git a/usr.sbin/syslogd/syslog.conf.5 b/usr.sbin/syslogd/syslog.conf.5 index c4d92a8..3e5ceec 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/syslogd/syslog.conf.5 +++ b/usr.sbin/syslogd/syslog.conf.5 @@ -66,15 +66,15 @@ field is separated from the .Em action field by one or more tab characters or spaces. .Pp -Note that if you use spaces as separators, your +Note that if you use spaces as separators, your .Pa syslog.conf might be incompatible with other Unices or Unix-like systems. This functionality was added for the ease of configuration -(e.g. it is possible to cut-and-paste into +(e.g. it is possible to cut-and-paste into .Pa syslog.conf -), +), and to avoid possible mistakes. -This change however preserves +This change however preserves backwards compatibility with the old style of the .Pa syslog.conf (i.e. tab characters only). @@ -100,8 +100,8 @@ are case insensitive. The .Em facility describes the part of the system generating the message, and is one of -the following keywords: auth, authpriv, console, cron, daemon, ftp, kern, -lpr, mail, mark, news, ntp, security, syslog, user, uucp and local0 through +the following keywords: auth, authpriv, console, cron, daemon, ftp, kern, +lpr, mail, mark, news, ntp, security, syslog, user, uucp and local0 through local7. These keywords (with the exception of mark) correspond to the similar @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ values specified to the .Xr syslog 3 library routine. .Pp -Each block of lines is separated from the previous block by a +Each block of lines is separated from the previous block by a .Em program or .Em hostname diff --git a/usr.sbin/syslogd/syslogd.8 b/usr.sbin/syslogd/syslogd.8 index a1a37a3..ff4bd3a 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/syslogd/syslogd.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/syslogd/syslogd.8 @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ the default is .It Fl k Disable the translation of messages received with facility -.Dq kern +.Dq kern to facility .Dq user . Usually the diff --git a/usr.sbin/tcpdump/tcpslice/tcpslice.1 b/usr.sbin/tcpdump/tcpslice/tcpslice.1 index 8b4c256..2b17f9f 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/tcpdump/tcpslice/tcpslice.1 +++ b/usr.sbin/tcpdump/tcpslice/tcpslice.1 @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ this the .Em first time . The ending time defaults to ten years after the starting time. Thus, the command -.Nm +.Nm .Ar trace-file simply copies .Ar trace-file diff --git a/usr.sbin/timed/timed/timed.8 b/usr.sbin/timed/timed/timed.8 index 1fc4bb4..1e77b04 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/timed/timed/timed.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/timed/timed/timed.8 @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ The daemon is a time server daemon which is normally invoked at boot time from the .Xr rc.network 8 -file. +file. It synchronizes the host's time with the time of other machines, which are also running .Nm , @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ are used by This option may be specified multiple times to add more than one network to the list. .It Fl F Ar host ... -Create a list of trusted hosts. +Create a list of trusted hosts. .Nm will only accept trusted hosts as masters. If it finds an untrusted host claiming to be master, @@ -115,9 +115,9 @@ is running with the utility. .El .Pp -The -.Fl n -and +The +.Fl n +and .Fl i are mutually exclusive and require as arguments real networks to which @@ -130,14 +130,14 @@ will listen on all connected networks. .Pp A .Nm -running without the -.Fl M -nor -.Fl F -flags will always remain a slave. -If the -.Fl F -flag is not used, +running without the +.Fl M +nor +.Fl F +flags will always remain a slave. +If the +.Fl F +flag is not used, .Nm will treat all machines as trustworthy. .Pp @@ -149,16 +149,16 @@ When is started on a machine, it asks the master for the network time and sets the host's clock to that time. After that, it accepts synchronization messages periodically sent by -the master and calls +the master and calls .Xr adjtime 2 to perform the needed corrections on the host's clock. .Pp It also communicates with .Xr date 1 in order to set the date globally, -and with +and with .Xr timedc 8 , -a +a .Nm control program. If the machine running the master becomes unreachable, @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ It will request synchronization service from the first master server located. If permitted by the .Fl M -or +or .Fl F flags, it will provide synchronization service on any attached networks on which no trusted master server was detected. @@ -195,14 +195,14 @@ it will begin the election process on that network. .Pp One way to synchronize a group of machines is to use an .Tn NTP -daemon to +daemon to synchronize the clock of one machine to a distant standard or a radio -receiver and +receiver and .Fl F Ar hostname to tell its timed daemon to trust only itself. .Pp Messages printed by the kernel on the system console occur with -interrupts disabled. +interrupts disabled. This means that the clock stops while they are printing. A machine with many disk or network hardware problems and consequent messages cannot keep good time by itself. Each message typically causes @@ -216,19 +216,19 @@ settings are often associated with "multi-homed" machines that looked for time masters on more than one network and eventually chose to become a slave on the other network. .Sh WARNINGS -If two or more time daemons, whether +If two or more time daemons, whether .Nm , .Tn NTP , try to adjust the same clock, temporal chaos will result. -If both +If both .Nm and another time daemon are run on the same machine, -ensure that the +ensure that the .Fl F -flag is used, so that +flag is used, so that .Nm never attempts to adjust the local clock. -.Pp +.Pp The protocol is based on .Tn UDP/IP broadcasts. All machines within @@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ Failure to follow this rule is usually indicated by complaints concerning .It Pa /var/log/timed.log tracing file for timed .It Pa /var/log/timed.masterlog -log file for master timed +log file for master timed .El .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr date 1 , diff --git a/usr.sbin/timed/timedc/timedc.8 b/usr.sbin/timed/timedc/timedc.8 index 7077825..c431c56 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/timed/timedc/timedc.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/timed/timedc/timedc.8 @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ It may be used to: .Bl -bullet .It Measure the differences between machines' clocks, -.It +.It Find the location where the master time server is running, .It Enable or disable tracing of messages received by diff --git a/usr.sbin/trpt/trpt.8 b/usr.sbin/trpt/trpt.8 index 35d0b84..fa3ab2e 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/trpt/trpt.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/trpt/trpt.8 @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ when a socket is marked for (see .Xr setsockopt 2 ) , and prints a readable description of these records. -When no options are supplied, +When no options are supplied, .Nm prints all the trace records found in the system grouped according to @@ -101,9 +101,9 @@ is as follows. Isolate the problem and enable debugging on the socket(s) involved in the connection. Find the address of the protocol control blocks -associated with the sockets using the +associated with the sockets using the .Fl A -option to +option to .Xr netstat 1 . Then run .Nm diff --git a/usr.sbin/tzsetup/tzsetup.8 b/usr.sbin/tzsetup/tzsetup.8 index 15b248e..bb28131 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/tzsetup/tzsetup.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/tzsetup/tzsetup.8 @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ current time zone file see .Xr adjkerntz 8 . .It Pa /usr/share/misc/iso3166 -mapping of +mapping of .Tn ISO 3166 territory codes to names .It Pa /usr/share/zoneinfo diff --git a/usr.sbin/usbd/usbd.8 b/usr.sbin/usbd/usbd.8 index d6c4c68..31f5554 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/usbd/usbd.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/usbd/usbd.8 @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND CONTRIBUTORS .\" ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED .\" TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR -.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS +.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS .\" BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR .\" CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF .\" SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS diff --git a/usr.sbin/usbdevs/usbdevs.8 b/usr.sbin/usbdevs/usbdevs.8 index bf91d19..50eac4c 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/usbdevs/usbdevs.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/usbdevs/usbdevs.8 @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND CONTRIBUTORS .\" ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED .\" TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR -.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS +.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS .\" BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR .\" CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF .\" SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS diff --git a/usr.sbin/vidcontrol/vidcontrol.1 b/usr.sbin/vidcontrol/vidcontrol.1 index 8c4b7a5..949a45f 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/vidcontrol/vidcontrol.1 +++ b/usr.sbin/vidcontrol/vidcontrol.1 @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ .Sh DESCRIPTION The .Nm -command is used to set various options for the +command is used to set various options for the .Xr syscons 4 console driver, such as video mode, colors, cursor shape, screen output map, font and screen @@ -104,14 +104,14 @@ command below to see available colors. .It Cm show See the supported colors on a given platform. .It Fl b Ar color -Set border color to +Set border color to .Ar color . This option may not be always supported by the video driver. .It Fl C Clear the history buffer. .It Fl c Cm normal | blink | destructive Change the cursor appearance. -The cursor is either an inverting block +The cursor is either an inverting block .Pq Cm normal that can optionally .Cm blink , @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ may be omitted, in this case .Nm will try to guess it from the size of font file. .Pp -Note that older video cards, such as MDA and CGA, do not support +Note that older video cards, such as MDA and CGA, do not support software font. See also .Sx Video Mode Support @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Switch the mouse pointer .Cm on or .Cm off . -Used together with the +Used together with the .Xr moused 8 daemon for text mode cut & paste functionality. .It Fl p @@ -209,8 +209,8 @@ ignoring nonprintable characters and information about text attributes. .It Fl r Ar foreground background Change reverse mode colors to -.Ar foreground -and +.Ar foreground +and .Ar background . .It Fl s Ar number Set the current vty to @@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ will fail if the user attempts to set a new video mode. It is better to always load all three sizes (8x8, 8x14 and 8x16) of the same font. .Pp -You may set variables in +You may set variables in .Pa /etc/rc.conf or .Pa /etc/rc.conf.local @@ -385,9 +385,9 @@ or .Pa /etc/rc.conf.local in order to configure the video output at boot time. .Pp -.Bl -tag -width foo_bar_var -compact +.Bl -tag -width foo_bar_var -compact .It Ar blanktime -Sets the timeout value for the +Sets the timeout value for the .Fl t option. .It Ar font8x16 , font8x14 , font8x8 @@ -398,9 +398,9 @@ option. Specifies a screen output map file for the .Fl l option. -.El -.Pp -See +.El +.Pp +See .Xr rc.conf 5 for more details. .Ss Driver Configuration diff --git a/usr.sbin/vipw/vipw.8 b/usr.sbin/vipw/vipw.8 index bc78289..a4f704a 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/vipw/vipw.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/vipw/vipw.8 @@ -54,11 +54,11 @@ The default editor for is .Xr vi 1 . .Pp -When run without options, +When run without options, .Nm will work with the password files in .Pa /etc . -The +The .Fl d option may be used to specify an alternative .Ar directory diff --git a/usr.sbin/wlconfig/wlconfig.8 b/usr.sbin/wlconfig/wlconfig.8 index 324e277..717b404 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/wlconfig/wlconfig.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/wlconfig/wlconfig.8 @@ -11,9 +11,9 @@ .Ar ifname .Op Ar param value ... .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm -command can be used to read and set parameters for the NCR/AT&T Wavelan +command can be used to read and set parameters for the NCR/AT&T Wavelan radio LAN card. Various parameters stored in the non-volatile Parameter Storage Area (PSA) on the card can be modified with this program, replacing the DOS-based @@ -23,17 +23,17 @@ strength cache which may have been compiled into the driver. .Pp The .Ar ifname -parameter specifies the wavelan interface name (eg. +parameter specifies the wavelan interface name (eg. .Pa wl0 ). If no other arguments are supplied, the current contents of the PSA are interpreted and displayed. .Pp The .Ar param -and +and .Ar value arguments can be used to change the value of several parameters. -Any number of +Any number of .Ar param value pairs may be supplied. .Bl -tag -width 15n -offset indent @@ -45,26 +45,26 @@ IRQ value (used at next reset), may be one of 3,4,5,6,10,11,12,15. Local MAC value (ethernet address). .It macsel .Sq soft -(as set by the +(as set by the .Sq mac parameter) or .Sq default (as set at the factory). .It nwid The NWID is a 2-byte parameter passed to the card's radio modem. -NWIDs allow multiple logically discrete networks to operate +NWIDs allow multiple logically discrete networks to operate independently whilst occupying the same airspace. Packets with a different NWID are simply ignored by the modem. In the hardware, NWIDs are stored long-term in non-volatile memory -(called the PSA or programmable storage area), and are loaded by -software into the radio modem when the driver is +(called the PSA or programmable storage area), and are loaded by +software into the radio modem when the driver is initialized. This sets the default NWID loaded at startup. .It currnwid This sets the current operating NWID (but does not save it to the PSA). .It cache The driver may maintain a per interface fixed size cache of signal strength, -silence, and quality levels, which are indexed by sender MAC addresses. +silence, and quality levels, which are indexed by sender MAC addresses. Input packets are stored in the cache, and when received, the values stored in the radio modem are interrogated and stored. There are also two sysctl values (iponly and multicast only) which @@ -73,8 +73,8 @@ cache mechanism stores only non-unicast IP packets, but this can be changed with .Xr sysctl 8 . Each non-filtered -input packet causes a cache update, hence one can monitor -the antennae signal strength to a remote system. +input packet causes a cache update, hence one can monitor +the antennae signal strength to a remote system. There are three commands that can be given as values: .Sq raw , which prints out the raw signal strength data as found in the radio @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ modem hardware value, .Sq scale , which scales the raw hardware values to 0..100%, and .Sq zero -which clears out the cache in case you want to store new samples. +which clears out the cache in case you want to store new samples. .El .Pp Note that if the IRQ on the Wavelan card is incorrect, the interface @@ -133,6 +133,6 @@ Print a scaled version of the signal strength cache : This implementation of the .Nm command is completely new, written for Hilink Internet by -.An Michael Smith , +.An Michael Smith , and updated by .An Jim Binkley &c . diff --git a/usr.sbin/yp_mkdb/yp_mkdb.8 b/usr.sbin/yp_mkdb/yp_mkdb.8 index 7876269..f0d3651 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/yp_mkdb/yp_mkdb.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/yp_mkdb/yp_mkdb.8 @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ These databases are typically stored in .Pa /var/yp/[domainname] where .Ar domainname -is the name of the NIS domain being served. +is the name of the NIS domain being served. .Nm Yp_mkdb is usually invoked by .Pa /var/yp/Makefile . diff --git a/usr.sbin/ypbind/ypbind.8 b/usr.sbin/ypbind/ypbind.8 index 2982342..0ea7d64 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/ypbind/ypbind.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/ypbind/ypbind.8 @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ Up to ten servers can be specified. There must not be any spaces between the commas in the domain/server specification. This option is used to insure that the system binds -only to one domain and only to one of the specified servers, which +only to one domain and only to one of the specified servers, which is useful for systems that are both NIS servers and NIS clients: it provides a way to restrict what machines the system can bind to without the need for specifying the diff --git a/usr.sbin/ypserv/ypserv.8 b/usr.sbin/ypserv/ypserv.8 index aa95ba2..8ac0ed8 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/ypserv/ypserv.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/ypserv/ypserv.8 @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Any requests made by non-privileged users are therefore rejected. Furthermore, the .Xr getpwent 3 routines in the -.Fx +.Fx standard C library will only attempt to retrieve data from the .Pa master.passwd.byname @@ -306,7 +306,7 @@ has some support for serving .Tn NIS v1 clients. The -.Fx +.Fx .Tn NIS implementation only uses the .Tn NIS |
